Skip to main content

Full text of "The general characters of the proteins"

See other formats


GENERA!,    G M R ACTERS 


*N  "*?*'**     *v*j    vw.     '*v""    i   • 

KINS 


SJV 


S.  fe.   SCHRVVER,  Ph.D.,  D;Sc 


MONOGRAPHS   ON   BIOCHEMISTRY 

EDITED   BY 

R.    H.   ADERS   PLIMMER,   D.Sc. 

AND 

F.    G.   HOPKINS,   M.A.,   M.B.,    D.Sc.,   F.R.S. 


MONOGRAPHS  ON  BIOCHEMISTRY. 

Royal  8vo,  boards. 

THE  DEVELOPMENT  AND  PRESENT  POSI- 
TION OF  BIOLOGICAL  CHEMISTRY.  By 
F.  GOWLAND  HOPKINS,  M.A.,  M.B.,  D.Sc.,  F.R.S. 

THE  NATURE  OF  ENZYME  ACTION.  By 
W.  M.  BAYLISS,  D.Sc.,  F.R.S.  35.  net. 

THE  CHEMICAL  CONSTITUTION  OF  THE 
PROTEINS.  By  R.  H.  ADERS  PLIMMER,  D.Sc. 
In  Two  Parts.  Part  I.,  33.  net;  Part  II., 
2s.  6d.  net. 

THE  GENERAL  CHARACTERS  OF  THE  PRO- 
TEINS. By  S.  B.  SCHRYVER,  Ph.D.,  D.Sc., 
2s.  6d.  net. 

THE  VEGETABLE  PROTEINS.      By  THOMAS  B. 

OSBORNE,    Ph.D. 

THE  POLYSACCHARIDES.  By  ARTHUR  R.  LING, 
F.I.C. 

GLUCOSE  AND  THE  GLUCOSIDES.  By  E. 
FRANKLAND  ARMSTRONG,  D.Sc.,  Ph.D. 

THE  FATS.     By  J.  B.  LEATHES,  D.Sc. 
COLLOIDS.    By  W.  B.  HARDY,  M.A.,  F.R.S. 

LONGMANS,  GREEN,  AND  CO. 

LONDON,  NEW  YORK,  BOMBAY,  AND  CALCUTTA. 


THE 


GENERAL    CHARACTERS 


OF 


THE   PROTEINS 


BY 


S.  B.  SCHRYVER,  Ph.D.,  D.Sc. 

LECTURER  ON   PHYSIOLOGICAL   CHEMISTRY,    UNIVERSITY   COLLEGE,   LONDON 


LONGMANS,     GREEN,     AND     CO. 

39  PATERNOSTER  ROW,  LONDON 

NEW  YORK,  BOMBAY,  AND  CALCUTTA 

1909 


GENERAL   PREFACE. 

THE  subject  of  Physiological  Chemistry,  or  Biochemistry,  is 
enlarging  its  borders  to  such  an  extent  at  the  present  time, 
that  no  single  text -book  upon  the  subject,  without  being 
cumbrous,  can  adequately  deal  with  it  as  a  whole,  so  as  to 
give  both  a  general  and  a  detailed  account  of  its  present 
position.  It  is,  moreover,  difficult,  in  the  case  of  the  larger 
text-books,  to  keep  abreast  of  so  rapidly  growing  a  science 
by  means  of  new  editions,  and  such  volumes  are  therefore 
issued  when  much  of  their  contents  has  become  obsolete. 

For  this  reason,  an  attempt  is  being  made  to  place  this 
branch  of  science  in  a  more  accessible  position  by  issuing 
a  series  of  monographs  upon  the  various  chapters  of  the 
subject,  each  independent  of  and  yet  dependent  upon  the 
others,  so  that  from  time  to  time,  as  new  material  and 
the  demand  therefor  necessitate,  a  new  edition  of  each  mono- 
graph can  be  issued  without  re-issuing  the  whole  series.  In 
this  way,  both  the  expenses  of  publication  and  the  expense 
to  the  purchaser  will  be  diminished,  and  by  a  moderate 
outlay  it  will  be  possible  to  obtain  a  full  account  of  any 
particular  subject  as  nearly  current  as  possible. 

The  editors  of  these  monographs  have  kept  two  objects 
in  view  :  firstly,  that  each  author  should  be  himself  working 
at  the  subject  with  which  he  deals  ;  and,  secondly,  that  a 
Bibliography,  as  complete  as  possible,  should  be  included, 
in  order  to  avoid  cross  references,  which  are  apt  to  be 
wrongly  cited,  and  in  order  that  each  monograph  may  yield 
full  and  independent  information  of  the  work  which  has  been 
done  upon  the  subject. 

It  has  been  decided  as  a  general  scheme  that  the  volumes 
first  issued  shall  deal  with  the  pure  chemistry  of  physiological 
products  and  with  certain  general  aspects  of  the  subject. 


vi  GENERAL  PREFACE 

» 

Subsequent  monographs  will  be  devoted  to  such  questions 
as  the  chemistry  of  special  tissues  and  particular  aspects  of 
metabolism.  So  the  series,  if  continued,  will  proceed  from 
physiological  chemistry  to  what  may  be  now  more  properly 
termed  chemical  physiology.  This  will  depend  upon  the 
success  which  the  first  series  achieves,  and  upon  the  divisions 
of  the  subject  which  may  be  of  interest  at  the  time. 

R.  H.  A.  P. 
F.  G.   H. 


PREFACE. 

IN  the  following  pages  an  attempt  is  made  to  review  the 
chief  properties  of  the  proteins,  with  the  object  of  determining 
how  far  they  are  of  value  for  devising  methods  of  isolation 
and  identification  of  individual  members  of  the  class. 

In  view  of  the  limited  scope  of  the  essay,  certain  aspects 
of  the  subject  have  been  purposely  treated  in  a  somewhat 
empirical  manner.  No  attempt,  for  example,  has  been  made 
to  explain  such  processes  as  "  salting  out "  or  heat  coagula- 
tion ;  subjects  such  as  these  may  be  more  fittingly  discussed 
in  a  monograph  dealing  with  the  general  chemical  physics  of 
colloids. 

In  spite  of  the  great  advances  recently  made  in  the  know- 
ledge of  the  physics  and  of  the  constitution  of  proteins,  the 
methods  available  for  their  isolation  and  identification  are 
still  very  unsatisfactory  in  character.  This  fact  may  serve 
as  an  apology  for  the  tentative  treatment  of  certain  sections 
of  this  book ;  the  importance  of  the  subject,  however,  both 
to  chemists  and  physiologists,  may  warrant  the  issue  of 
this  monograph,  dealing,  as  it  does,  with  a  part  of  protein 
chemistry  still  in  a  rudimentary  state  of  development. 

S.  B.  S. 


vii 


CONTENTS. 


PAGE 

INTRODUCTION  .  i 


PART   I. 
THE  PHYSICAL  PROPERTIES  OF  THE  PROTEINS. 

SECTION 

I.  THE  SOLUBILITY  OF  PROTEINS   IN   SALT  SOLUTIONS  ;  THE 

"SALTING  OUT"  FROM  SOLUTIONS       ....         8 

II.  THE  DEGREE  OF  SOLUBILITY  OF  PROTEINS  IN  SALT  SOLU- 
TIONS           15 

III.  SOLUBILITY  OF  PROTEINS  IN  ORGANIC  SOLVENTS        .        .       16 

IV.  SEPARATION   OF  PROTEINS   FROM   SOLUTION   BY   PRECIPIT- 

ANTS    OTHER   THAN   SALTS     .  .  .  .  .  .17 

V.  CRYSTALLISATION  OF  PROTEINS          .       ,.         .         .         .       18 

VI.  THE  TEMPERATURE  OF  HEAT   COAGULATION   OF   PROTEIN 

SOLUTIONS  .        .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .21 

VII.  OPTICAL  ROTATION  OF  PROTEIN  SOLUTIONS       ...       24 

VIII.  MOLECULAR    WEIGHT    DETERMINATIONS     BY     CRYOSCOPIC 

METHODS 24 

IX.  THE  ELECTROLYTIC  CONDUCTIVITY  OF  PROTEIN  SOLUTIONS       26 

X.  THE  "GOLD  NUMBER" 27 

XL  THE  FRACTIONAL  FILTRATION  OF  PROTEINS  28 


x  CONTENTS 

I 

PART   II. 

THE  GENERAL  CHEMICAL  CHARACTERS  OF 
THE  PROTEINS. 

SECTION  PAGE 

XII.  THE  QUALITATIVE  REACTIONS  OF  THE  PROTEINS       .         .       30 

XIII.  THE  CHEMICAL  COMPOSITION  OF  PROTEINS.    THE  NITROGEN 

CONTENT  AND  DISTRIBUTION 32 

XIV.  THE  SULPHUR,  PHOSPHORUS  AND  HALOGEN   CONTENT   OF 

PROTEINS 36 

XV.  THE  TYROSINE  FACTOR  OF  PROTEINS        .         .         .         .38 

XVI.  SALT  FORMATION  BY  PROTEINS.    COMBINATION  WITH  ACIDS 

AND  BASES 39 

XVII.  THE  PRECIPITATION  OF  PROTEINS  BY  SALTS  OF  THE  HEAVY 

METALS 56 

XVIII.  THE  OXIDATION  OF  THE  PROTEINS 58 

XIX.  THE  ACTION  OF  HALOGENS  ON  PROTEINS         .         .         .61 

XX.  THE  ACTION  OF  NITROUS  ACID  ON  PROTEINS  .         .         .67 

XXI.  ACTION  OF  FORMALDEHYDE  ON  PROTEINS          ...       69 


PART  III. 

BIOLOGICAL  METHODS  FOR  THE  IDENTIFICATION 
AND  DIFFERENTIATION  OF  PROTEINS. 

XXII.  THE  PRECIPITIN  REACTION       .         .  .         .         .71 

BIBLIOGRAPHY  .         . 78 

INDEX      .         .         .         .         ...         .         .         .85 


INTRODUCTION. 

THE  proteins  belong  for  the  most  part  to  that  class  of  bodies  which 
Graham  has  designated  the  "  colloids,"  to  which  the  ordinary  criteria 
available  for  the  identification  and  differentiation  of  simpler  organic 
compounds,  such  as  boiling  points,  melting  points,  etc.,  are  generally 
inapplicable.  The  want  of  knowledge  of  the  physical  nature  of 
colloids  has  been  one  of  the  chief  obstacles  to  advances  in  the  experi- 
mental investigations  of  the  proteins.  The  principal  problem 
affected  thereby  is  that  of  the  separation  of  the  proteins  from  one 
another  and  from  other  substances.  The  proteins,  furthermore,  are 
substances  of  large  molecular  weight,  yielding  on  degradation  a 
great  number  of  products,  the  isolation  and  quantitative  estimation  of 
which  have  taxed  the  ingenuity  of  the  chemist  to  the  utmost. 

The  investigations  on  the  proteins  may  be  consequently  divided 
into  two  main  classes :  (i)  those  connected  with  the  elucidation  of  their 
physical  properties  as  colloids,  with  which  are  associated  the  names 
of  Hardy  in  this  country,  and  of  Hofmeister,  Spiro,  Pauli  and  many 
others  on  the  continent;  (ii)  those  connected  with  their  chemical 
constitution,  with  which  are  associated  the  names  of  Emil  Fischer 
and  of  Kossel  and  their  pupils.  A  short  review  of  certain  aspects 
of  protein  chemistry  in  the  light  of  the  more  recent  advances  will  be 
advisable  before  proceeding  to  a  more  detailed  discussion  of  those 
properties  which  may  be  utilised  in  the  processes  for  the  isolation 
and  identification  of  individual  substances  belonging  to  the  class. 

ISOLATION  AND  SEPARATION  OF  THE  PROTEINS. 

Proteins  derived  from  different  sources  have  markedly  different 
properties.  Some  are  soluble  in  water,  others  are  insoluble  in  pure 
water,  but  soluble  in  saline  solutions ;  others,  again,  are  soluble  in 
alcohol.  Advantage  was  taken  of  these  differences  for  the  separation 
of  proteins  from  one  another,  especially  in  the  earlier  work  on  the 
vegetable  proteins. 

Another  property,  viz.,  that  of  precipitability  from  aqueous 
solutions  by  the  addition  of  neutral  salts,  also  received  early  attention, 
and  the  difference  in  behaviour  of  solutions  of  different  proteins  as 
regards  precipitability  was  soon  turned  to  account  in  devising  a 
method  of  separation.  It  is  of  interest  in  this  place  to  quote  the 
words  of  Denis,  the  first  investigator  who  systematically  employed 
the  method  of  "  salting  out ".  On  the  title-page  of  his  monograph, 
Memoir e  sur  le  sang,  published  in  1856,  but  containing  results  of  work 
commenced  many  years  before  this  date,  he  describes  his  researches 
as  "  e*tudes  faites  suivant  la  methode  d'experi mentation  par  les  sels,  la 


2      THE  GENERAL  CHARACTERS  OF  THE  PROTEINS 

seule  qui,  dans  1'etat  actuel  de  la  science,  semble  pouvoir  etre  applique 
avec  fruits  a  des  reserches  sur  ces  substances".1  Although  these 
words  were  written  more  than  forty  years  ago,  when  the  protein 
investigations  were  still  in  their  infancy,  they  contain  a  statement 
which  is  substantially  true  to-day,  for  the  process  of  "  salting  out " 
is  the  only  one  which  is  capable  of  general  application  for  the 
separation  of  the  proteins.  Like  the  analogous  processes  of  fractional 
distillation  and  fractional  precipitation,  the  process  of  fractional 
"  salting  out "  seldom  leads  to  a  complete  separation  of  mixtures. 
The  efficiency  and  the  gradual  development  of  the  technique  is 
discussed  in  that  section  of  this  work,  which,  owing  to  the  actual  and 
historical  importance  of  the  subject,  precedes  all  others  dealing  with 
the  general  character  of  the  proteins.  It  has  purposely  been  treated 
in  a  somewhat  empirical  fashion  ;  the  physical  nature  of  the  process 
will,  it  is  hoped,  be  dealt  with  in  greater  detail  in  a  later  volume  of 
this  series. 

THE  CHEMICAL  NATURE  OF  THE  PROTEINS. 

Although  it  was  clearly  recognised  that  the  nitrogenous  matters 
obtainable  from  plants  and  animals  varied  considerably  in  their 
physical  properties,  such  as  in  solubility,  appearance,  etc.,  it  was 
nevertheless  held  by  Liebig  that  only  one  protein  existed.  The 
differences  in  the  nitrogenous  substances  obtained  from  various  sources 
were  ascribed  entirely  to  variations  in  physical  conditions.  The  slight 
differences  in  empirical  composition  in  the  preparations  obtained 
accounted,  no  doubt,  for  this  view  of  Liebig.  Mulder,  to  whom  many 
valuable  observations  are  due,  expressed  later  a  similar  view  in  a 
somewhat  modified  form.  Referring  to  "  protein  "  he  remarks  :  "It 
exists  in  various  forms,  being  either  soluble  or  insoluble  in  water.  It 
forms  different  compounds  with  sulphur  or  with  phosphorus  or  both 
— and  hence  the  differences  it  presents  in  appearance  and  physical 
properties.  The  substance  has  received  the  name  of  '  protein ' 
because  it  is  the  origin  of  so  many  dissimilar  bodies,  and  is  itself  a 
primary  substance  "  (Mulder,  Vegetable  and  Physiological  Chemistry \ 
p.  291.  English  translation,  1845-49). 

Subsequent  investigations  have  shown  that  these  early  views  of 
Liebig  and  Mulder  are  incorrect,  more  especially  the  careful  and 
reliable  experiments  of  Schiitzenberger,  Hlasiwetz  and  Habermann, 
Horbaczewski,  Schulze  and  Barbieri  and  others,  most  of  which  were 
carried  out  thirty  years  or  more  after  the  publication  of  the  above- 
quoted  words  of  Mulder.  It  is  unnecessary  to  enter  into  detail  in  this 
place  as  to  the  results  of  the  experiments  on  the  hydrolysis  of  the 
proteins,  due  to  these  and  other  workers,  culminating  subsequently  in 
the  elaboration  by  E.  Fischer  and  his  pupils  of  an  approximately 
quantitative  method  for  the  isolation  of  the  hydrolysis  products  ;  these 
are  discussed  in  the  volume  devoted  to  this  subject.  Suffice  it  here  to 
say  that  the  individual  proteins  have  been  found  to  differ  from  one 
another  both  qualitatively  and  quantitatively  as  regards  the  amino- 
acids  which  they  yield  on  hydrolysis. 

Modern  work  tends  to  confirm  the  theory  due  to  Hofmeister  that 

li.e.,  proteins, 


INTRODUCTION  3 

the  proteins  are  built  up  by  the  condensation  of  several  amino-acids 
according1  to  the  scheme — 


Ri  Rii  Riii 

NH2.CH  — COJOH    H;NH.CH-CobH.  HJNH2—  CH  —  Cok)H  H;NH3.— 




...  —  CO|OH     H;NH2 .  CH .  COOH 

thereby  forming  a  class  of  products  which  have  been  designated 
the  polypeptides  by  Fischer.  Such  polypeptides  are  held  to  form  the 
essential  part  of  the  structure  of  the  protein  molecule  ;  the  latter  may, 
however,  contain  other  groups,  such  as  phosphoric  acid,  and  possibly 
also  carbohydrates  ;  as  to  whether  such  groups  form  an  essential  part 
of  the  actual  protein  molecule,  or  whether  they  are  held  in  loose 
combination  in  the  form  of  what  Hoppe-Seyler  described  as 
"  prosthetic  groups,"  need  not  be  discussed  in  detail  here.  There  is, 
however,  a  certain  amount  of  evidence  that  phosphoric  acid,  in  the  case 
of  caseinogen,  for  example,  forms  an  essential  part  of  the  molecule. 
Whatever  view  may  be  held  as  to  the  other  groups,  there  is  little  doubt 
that  the  polypeptide  group  forms  the  essential  part  of  the  protein 
molecule,  and  that  it  is  formed  by  the  conjugation  of  different  amino 
acids  in  the  different  individual  members  of  the  protein  class. 

THE  RELATIVE  VALUE  OF  THE  VARIOUS  PHYSICAL  AND 
CHEMICAL  CHARACTERS  FOR  FIXING  THE  IDENTITY  OF  A 
PROTEIN  CONSIDERED  IN  THE  LIGHT  OF  PRESENT 
KNOWLEDGE. 

As  already  mentioned,  the  majority  of  the  proteins  differ  from  one 
another  but  slightly  in  their  empirical  chemical  constitution ;  the 
numbers  obtained  by  the  ultimate  chemical  analysis  are  therefore,  as 
a  rule,  of  but  little  value  for  the  characterisation  of  proteins.  The 
most  obvious  method  for  differentiation  of  the  proteins  is  that  of  the 
quantitative  estimation  of  hydrolysis  products.  This  process,  however, 
yields  reliable  results  only  when  relatively  large  quantities  of  material 
are  available  for  examination,  and  it  requires,  furthermore,  considerable 
expenditure  of  time.  In  actual  practice,  such  as  in  physiological  and 
pathological  research,  or  in  the  investigation  of  foodstuffs,  it  is,  as  a 
rule,  quite  inapplicable  ;  it  affords,  moreover,  no  certain  criterion  as  to 
the  homogeneity  or  heterogeneity  of  the  substance  under  investigation. 

On  the  assumption,  then,  that  the  protein  is  a  polypeptide,  it 
remains  to  be  considered  what  chemical  and  physical  properties  may 
most  fittingly  serve  for  its  characterisation. 

The  Acid  and  Basic  Functions  of  the  Protein  Molecule  and  their 
Relations  to  the  Physical  Properties. 

The  discussion  of  the  above  question  will  be  facilitated  by  the 
consideration  of  the  properties  of  a  typical  polypeptide,  e.g.^ 
the  tetrapeptide :— 


4     THE  GENERAL  CHARACTERS  OF  THE  PROTEINS 

» 

Ri  Ri»  Riii  Riv 

CH  —  NH  —  CO  —  CH  —  NH  —  CO  —  CH  —  NH  —  CO  —  CH 
COOH  NH2 

The  presence  of  both  an  amino  and  a  carboxyl  group  would 
indicate  the  possibility  of  the  formation  of  two  kinds  of  salts,  viz., 
salts  with  acids  and  salts  with  bases.  The  acidity  or  basicity  of  a 
protein  is  the  property  which  most  obviously  requires  investigation.  I  f 
all  were  constituted  like  the  substance  of  the  formula  given  above,  with 
R1,  R",  .  .  .  Riv  representing  simple  radicals,  containing  only  carbon 
and  hydrogen,  each  molecule  of  protein  would  react  chemically  with 
one  molecule  of  acid  or  one  molecule  of  base.  In  practice,  however, 
the  problem  of  the  acidity  or  basicity  is  not  so  simple  as  might  at  first 
sight  appear.  In  the  first  place,  proteins  do  not  yield  on  hydrolysis 
simple  monoamino  acids ;  other  products  of  a  more  basic  character 
are  obtainable,  such  as  arginine,  lysine  (which  is  a  simple  diamino 
acid)  and  histidine.  Similarly  on  hydrolysis  proteins  yield  amino 
acids  containing  more  than  one  carboxylic  acid  group,  such  as  aspartic 
acid,  glutamic  acid,  etc.  Simple  polypeptides,  yielding  either 
strongly  acid  or  basic  amino  acids  on  hydrolysis,  could  be  represented 
by  the  typical  formula,  in  which  R1,  R",  etc.,  instead  of  representing 
simple  radicals  of  carbon  and  hydrogen,  would  represent  radicals  in 
which  one  or  more  hydrogen  atoms  are  substituted  by  a  carboxyl 
or  amino  group. 

The  existence  of  such  extra  amino  or  carboxyl  groups  gives  rise 
to  a  further  possible  complication,  for  they  can  condense  with 
carboxyl  and  amino  groups  of  other  polypeptides,  and  thus  give  rise 
to  substances  of  highly  complex  molecular  structure  with  branching 
chains  of  polypeptide  nature.  The  proteins,  considered  as  polypeptides, 
which  yield  on  hydrolysis  both  diamino-  and  dicarboxylic  acids,  can 
act,  therefore,  either  as  basic  or  acidic  bodies,  according  to  whether  the 
amino  or  carboxyl  groups  predominate.1 

As  a  matter  of  fact,  certain  proteins,  such  as  the  protamines,  first 
described  by  Miescher,  have  very  strongly  marked  basic  characters  ; 
these  substances  yield  on  hydrolysis  more  than  80  per  cent,  of  basic 
products,  and  the  molecules  contain,  therefore,  a  large  predominance 
of  amino  groups.  Other  proteins  are  of  distinctly  acid  character, 

1  Nothing  is  known  as  to  the  stereochemical  configuration  of  proteins.  H.  E.  and 
E.  F.  Armstrong  have  suggested  that  the  main  polypeptide  can  assume  a  spiral  form, 
and  have  constructed  models  to  represent  it  according  to  this  hypothesis.  In  this  case 
the  more  reactive  groups  might  be  represented  as  the  freely  moving  groups  external  to 
the  spiral.  The  stereochemical  configuration  would  probably  also  affect  the  reactivity 
of  the  amino  and  carboxyl  groups ;  adopting  the  Armstrong  configuration  it  is  conceiv- 
able that  those  which  are  external  to  the  spiral  would  be  reactive,  and  those  protected 
by  groups  of  other  atoms  inert.  Furthermore,  it  is  conceivable  that  certain  stereo- 
chemical  configurations  would  be  favourable  to  the  formation  of  imino  groups  through 
the  elimination  of  ammonia  from  contiguous  amino  groups,  or  of  acid  anhydrides  by 
elimination  of  water  from  carboxyl  groups,  diminishing  the  basicity  in  the  former  and 
the  acidity  in  the  latter  case.  It  is  therefore  not  possible  to  predict  the  acidic  or  basic 
character  of  the  protein  from  the  mere  estimation  of  the  hydrolysis  products,  ascertaining 
thus  whether  diamino  or  dicarboxylic  groups  predominate,  as  stereochemical  configura- 
tion may  render  either  sets  of  groups  inactive.  Furthermore,  a  certain  amount  of 
ammonia  is  obtainable  from  most  proteins  on  hydrolysis  (see  p.  33) ;  this  is  assumed  to 
be  derived  by  the  hydrolysis  of  acid  amides  containing  the  group- CO -NH2.  The 
existence  of  such  groups  would  diminish  the  acidity  due  to  the  presence  of  carbpxyl 
groups. 


INTRODUCTION 


5 


such  as  some  of  the  globulins  and  caseinogen,  although  this  character 
may  be  ascribed  in  the  latter  substance  to  the  presence  of  the 
phosphoric  acid  group  in  the  molecule. 

The  majority  of  the  proteins,  however,  have  neither  marked  basic 
nor  acidic  character,  and  in  this  respect  resemble  the  typical 
polypeptide  of  the  typical  formula  with  the  radicals  R1,  R",  etc., 
containing  only  carbon  and  hydrogen  atoms. 

The  determination  of  the  acidity  and  basicity  of  proteins  of  this 
character  has  entailed  many  difficulties.  This  arises  from  the  capacity 
of  proteins  as  colloids  to  adsorb  simpler  substances  and  from  the 
large  molecular  weights  of  this  class  of  substances  and  relatively  small 
number  of  active  carboxylic  and  amino  groups  ;  the  equivalent  com- 
bining weight  is  therefore  large ;  in  the  case  of  the  crude  egg- 
albumins  Sjoqvist  has  shown  (p.  40)  that  between  800  and  900  grams 
of  protein  combine  with  I  gram  mol.  equivalent  of  hydrochloric  acid 
to  form  the  hydrochloride  salt. 

Now  a  solution  which  contains  a  relatively  large  percentage  of  a 
solute  of  large  molecular  weight  is  technically  very  dilute ;  on  the 
assumption  that  the  protein  of  egg-white  is  a  mono-acid  base,  its 
molecular  weight  would  be  about  850,  which,  according  to  the 
experiments  of  Sjoqvist,  is  the  lowest  possible ;  a  5  per  cent,  solution 
would  be  therefore  only  j^  normal.  The  salts  of  weak  bases  in 
dilute  solution  readily  undergo  hydrolysis  according  to  the  equation — 

B .  HC1  +  HOH  =  B .  OH  +  HC1. 

The  acidity  or  basicity  of  a  protein  cannot,  as  a  rule,  be  determined, 
therefore,  by  titration  with  the  use  of  indicators,  since  hydrolysis  of 
salts  can  take  place  in  solutions  containing  relatively  large  amounts 
of  protein. 

Furthermore,  Hardy  has  pointed  out  in  the  case  of  the  globulins 
the  possibility  of  the  formation  of  basic  salts.  If  serum-globulin  be 
submitted  to  dialysis  (see  p.  54)  it  can  hydrolyse  according  to  the 
equation — 

x  GHAc  +  y  HOH  =  (GHOH)j,  (GHAc)x-y  +  y  HAc. 

Where  Ac  represents  an  acid  ion.  As  y  increases,  the  protein 
becomes  more  and  more  basic^  and  the  negative  ion  increases  in  size, 
the  change  being  indicated  by  the  alteration  in  the  appearance  of  the 
solution,  which  becomes  gradually  more  and  more  opalescent  until  it 
is  finally  nearly  opaque.  It  has  still  more  or  less  the  properties  of  a 
true  solution,  the  opacity  being  due  to  the  formation  of  what  Hardy 
calls  pseudo-ions,  which  can  still  take  part  in  the  transport  of  electricity, 
and  which,  on  increasing  hydrolysis,  become  so  large  as  to  be  capable 
of  diffracting  light.  A  basic  salt  is  finally  obtained  containing  a  very 
small  amount  of  acid. 

The  above  considerations  have  an  important  bearing  upon  the 
choice  of  constants  to  be  chosen  for  the  characterisation  of  proteins, 
for  it  will  be  obviously  impossible  to  directly  determine  in  most  cases 
whether  a  given  solution  contains  a  free  protein  or  a  salt  of  the  same. 
Indicators,  as  already  stated,  are  useless  for  the  purpose,  and  owing  to 
the  possibility  of  the  formation  of  acid  or  basic  salts  very  minute 
quantities  of  an  acid  or  base  will  very  often  suffice  to  entirely  alter 
the  character  of  a  solution.  There  exists,  therefore,  very  great 


6     THE  GENERAL  CHARACTERS  OF  THE  PROTEINS 

» 

difficulty  in  obtaining  reliable  physical  constants  for  proteins,  for  the 
physical  differences  between  free  bases  and  free  acids,  and  the  salts 
obtainable  therefrom,  are,  in  the  case  of  almost  all  physical  constants, 
very  considerable.  To  indicate  but  one  instance  :  Leucine  as  a 

free  base  has  an  optical  rotation  of  a  =  -  10*42°,  whereas  the 
rotation  of  its  hydrochloride  is  a,  =  +  15*3 3°  in  20  per  cent. 

hydrochloric  acid. 

Electrolytic  conductivity,  osmotic  pressure,  and  many  other 
physical  properties  are  also  profoundly  affected  by  the  above  con- 
siderations, and  attention  has  been  called  in  the  following  pages  to 
the  circumstances  which  so  often  render  physical  determinations 
unreliable. 

There  is  still  one  other  disturbing  influence  to  be  noted.  Owing 
to  the  amphoteric  character  of  the  proteins,  and  their  capacity  to  form 
salts  with  acids  and  bases,  they  can  also  conceivably  form  compounds 
with  neutral  salts.  Now  colloids  have  a  considerable  power  of  ad- 
sorbing other  bodies,  a  circumstance  which  also,  as  already  mentioned, 
considerably  affects  the  determinations  of  the  acidic  and  basic  func- 
tions of  a  protein.  It  is  seldom,  if  ever,  that  an  ash-free  protein 
is  obtainable,  and  it  is  impossible  to  determine  whether  the  ash 
represents  inorganic  substance  in  actual  combination,  e.g.,  sodium  in 
the  form  of  a  sodium  salt,  or  whether  it  owes  its  origin  to  bodies 
which  have  been  physically  adsorbed  ;  the  mineral  substances  present 
have,  under  any  circumstances,  a  great  influence  on  the  physical 
properties  of  the  protein. 

The  above  considerations  render  the  majority  of  the  physical 
properties  extremely  unreliable  for  the  characterisation  of  the 
proteins ;  the  precipitability  by  salts  is,  alone  amongst  the  properties 
generally  determined,  but  slightly  affected  by  them. 

Chemical  Characteristics. 

It  is  upon  the  chemical  properties,  therefore,  that  reliance  must 
be  chiefly  placed  for  obtaining  constants  for  the  characterisation  of 
proteins. 

The  most  reliable  of  these  are  undoubtedly  the  numbers  represent- 
ing the  distribution  of  nitrogen  in  the  molecule,  and  generally  known 
as  the  "  Hausmann  numbers  ".  These  indicate  the  relative  propor- 
tions of  nitrogen  in  the  molecule  combined  in  the  form  of  amide, 
of  monoamino  acids,  and  of  basic  bodies.1  They  are  discussed  in 
detail  on  pp.  33-36. 

The  number  of  "  active "  2  amino  groups  also  varies  in  the 
different  proteins ;  to  determine  these  Dr.  Horace  Brown  has 
suggested  the  determination  of  the  "  amino-index  "  (p.  67).  Another 
suggestion  for  the  determination  of  this  factor  is  due  to  Messrs. 
Cross,  Bevan  and  Briggs  (p.  65).  The  capacity  also  for  forming 
halogen  derivatives  varies  considerably  in  the  different  proteins ;  the 
halogen  numbers  should  serve  also  as  a  method  of  characterisation. 
Furthermore,  different  proteins  yield  different  quantities  of  hydrolysis. 

1  See  p.  4,  ?  Footnote,  p.  4. 


INTRODUCTION  7 

products,  which  can  be  readily  estimated  quantitatively  without  the 
employment  of  the  elaborate  esterification  method.  Amongst  these 
cystine  can  be  estimated  by  determination  of  the  sulphur  content  of 
the  protein,  and  tyrosine  by  the  method  suggested  by  Millar  (p.  38). 
The  cystine  and  tyrosine  factors  should  therefore  be  of  value. 

Much  work  remains  to  be  done  in  the  elaboration  of  quantitative 
reactions  which  might  serve  for  the  characterisation  of  the  proteins. 
It  is  not  necessary  that  these  reactions  should  lead  always  to  the 
formation  of  definite  chemical  compounds ;  it  would  be  sufficient  if 
standard  conditions  could  be  chosen,  under  which  a  definite  amount 
of  chemical  reaction  should  take  place.  Similar  methods  have  been 
employed  in  the  case  of  the  fats,  as  an  instance  of  which  may  be 
cited  the  so-called  Hiibl  iodine  number.  This  indicates  approxi- 
mately the  number  of  double  bonds  in  a  given  fat,  but  it  is  generally 
admitted  that  the  addition  of  iodine  at  the  double  bonds  is  accom- 
panied by  a  certain  amount  of  substitution.  Under  defined  conditions, 
however,  the  amount  of  iodine  absorbed  is  a  constant  for  each 
particular  fat. 

Similar  reactions  are  required  for  the  identification  of  proteins, 
and  the  various  suggestions  which  have  been  made  in  this  respect 
have  received  what  will  be,  it  is  hoped,  adequate  consideration  in  the 
following  pages. 


PART  I. 
THE  PHYSICAL  PROPERTIES  OF  THE  PROTEINS. 

SECTION  I.— THE  SOLUBILITY  OF  PROTEINS  IN  SALT  SOLUTIONS  ; 
THE  "  SALTING  OUT  "  FROM  SOLUTIONS. 

THE  method  which  has  been  most  commonly  employed  hitherto,  for 
the  separation  of  proteins  from  one  another  and  from  other  bodies 
is  that  commonly  known  as  "salting  out".  It  was  noticed  as  long 
ago  as  1853  by  Panum  that  dry  sodium  chloride  does  not  precipitate 
egg-white  in  the  cold,  whereas  blood-serum  gives  a  distinct  precipi- 
tate which  redissolves  in  distilled  water.  Claude  Bernard  had  also 
observed  that  pancreatic  juice  yielded  a  precipitate  with  magnesium 
sulphate;  Robin  and  Verdeil  (1853)  made  a  similar  observation 
with  ascitic  fluid.  The  latter  investigators  noticed  also  that  mag- 
nesium sulphate  gave  a  precipitate  with  egg-white  and  with  serum, 
the  filtrate  from  which  coagulated  on  heating,  whereas  the  filtrate 
from  a  similar  precipitate  with  pancreatic  juice  did  not. 

Virchow,  in  the  following  year,  carried  out  further  investigations 
on  this  subject,  and  found  that,  besides  magnesium  sulphate,  other 
salts,  such  as  potassium  sulphate,  sodium  sulphate,  alum,  calcium 
chloride,  sodium  chloride,  possess  the  property  of  precipitating 
proteins ;  he  also  made  the  fundamental  observation  that  the 
precipitates  formed  by  salts  redissolved  in  water,  and  that  the 
solutions  thus  obtained  behaved  as  true  protein  solutions.  He 
confirmed  also  the  French  observers,  in  noticing  that  the  salt  does 
not  always  precipitate  the  whole  of  the  protein,  and  he  assumed  that 
the  latter  must  exist  in  solution  in  different  conditions.  At  this 
time  the  existence  of  several  kinds  of  protein  was  unknown,  and 
Virchow  did  not  recognise  the  fact  that  many  such  bodies  could 
exist,  and  that  their  different  behaviour  towards  salt  solutions  was  a 
factor  which  could  be  employed  for  a  partial  separation,  at  any  rate, 
of  one  protein  from  another. 

De"nis l  first  clearly  discriminated  between  proteins  in  this  respect. 
He  noticed  that  some  are  readily  soluble  in  salt  solutions,  which  are 
insoluble  in  water.  He  found,  for  example,  that  certain  proteins  are 
soluble  in  10  per  cent  sodium  chloride,  potassium  nitrate,  and 
sodium  sulphate  solutions  at  30°  C.,  from  which  they  could  be 
reprecipitated  on  dilution  with  water ;  he  studied  also  the  precipita- 
tion of  proteins  from  blood-serum  by  saturation  with  neutral  salts, 
employing  for  this  purpose  sulphate  of  sodium,  chloride  of  sodium, 
and  sulphate  of  magnesium.  Denis  must  be  regarded,  therefore,  as 

1  D^nis  had  commenced  his  investigations  on  the"  proteins  in  1835.  His  mono- 
graphs on  the  subject  were  published  in  1856  and  1859. 

8 


THE  PHYSICAL  PROPERTIES  OF  THE  PROTEINS     9 

the   pioneer  in   the  systematic  separation  of  the  proteins  by  the 
method  of  "  salting  out ". 

Denis  included  in  his  investigations  not  only  proteins  of  animal 
origin,  but  also  bodies  of  a  similar  nature  derived  from  plants.  To 
those  proteins  which  are  soluble  in  10  per  cent,  sodium  chloride 
solution,  from  which  they  can  be  precipitated  on  dilution  (especially 
after  saturation  of  the  diluted  solution  with  CO2),  Hoppe-Seyler 
gave  the  name  of  "  globulins ".  They  formed  the  subject  of  an 
investigation  carried  out  in  Hoppe-Seyler's  laboratory  by  his  pupil 
Weyl  (1877),  by  whom  the  general  reactions  were  clearly  defined. 
To  this  class  belong  vitellin,  the  protein  derived  from  egg-yolk,  the 
protein  first  isolated  from  striated  muscle  by  Kiihne,  and  called  by 
him  myosin,  the  serum-globulin,  and  various  plant  proteins.  Weyl 
divided  the  globulins  into  two  classes,  vtz.t  those  which  are  soluble 
in  sodium  chloride  of  high  concentration  (".  vitellins  ")  and  those 
which  can  be  precipitated  from  the  10  per  cent,  solution  by  saturation . 
with  more  salt  ("  myosins  "J.1 

In  addition  to  this  work  from  Hoppe-Seyler's  laboratory, 
numerous  other  researches  on  the  separations  of  proteins  by  salt 
precipitation  appeared  between  the  years  1865  and  1885. 

Hammarsten  investigated  the  precipitation  of  serum  by  sodium 
chloride  and  magnesium  sulphate,  which  only  precipitate  a  fraction 
of  the  proteins  ;  his  investigations  were  supplemented  by  those  of 
Heynsius,2  who  some  years  later  (1884)  called  attention  to  the  great 
precipitating  power  of  ammonium  sulphate ;  in  this  respect  it  is  far 
superior  to  the  corresponding  sodium  salt,  which  Starke  (in  Ham- 
marsten's  laboratory)  and  independently,  Schafer,  had  a  short  time 
previously  shown  possessed  the  power  of  precipitating  proteins  in  the 
filtrate  from  the  magnesium  sulphate  precipitate. 

As  a  result  of  these  various  investigations,  two  classes  of  pre- 
cipitating salts  were  introduced  into  general  use  for  the  separation  of 
proteins,  viz.,  magnesium  sulphate  and  sodium  chloride,  which 
precipitate  the  so-called  "  globulin  "  fraction,  and  ammonium  sul- 
phate, which  precipitates  from  the  filtrate  the  "  albumin  "  fraction. 

By  the  systematic  application  of  these  salts  by  Halliburton  to  the 
separation  of  natural  proteins  of  serum,  muscle  and  milk,  much 
light  was  thrown  on  the  constituents  of  animal  tissues  and  fluids. 

Halliburton  showed  that  serum  could  be  separated  into  its 
constituents  by  salts  other  than  those  already  mentioned ;  he  found, 
for  example,  that  sodium  nitrate,  sodium  acetate  and  sodium  carbonate 
could  also  precipitate  serum-globulin,  whilst  potassium  acetate  and 
potassium  phosphate  precipitated  from  serum  all  the  heat-coagulable 
proteins.  He  also  applied  the  method  of  salt  precipitation  to 
investigations  on  muscle-plasma  and  milk.  He  concluded  that  in 
the  former  several  proteins  existed,  whereas  in  the  latter  only  two 
could  be  recognised,  viz.,  casein  (or,  as  it  is  now  termed,  caseinogen) 
and  lact-albumin. 

Another  application  of  the  salt  precipitation  about  this  period 
deserves  to  be  mentioned.  Wenz  showed,  in  1886,  that  peptones 
were  not  precipitated  by  ammonium  sulphate,  and  Kiihne  and 
Chittenden  utilised  this  observation  for  separating  the  proteoses 

1  The  present  classification  of  the  proteins  is  given  in  Dr.  Plimmer's  monograph. 

2  Ammonium  sulphate  had  also  been  previously  employed  by  Me"hu. 

2  * 


to   THE  GENERAL  CHARACTERS  OF  THE  PROTEINS 


from  the  peptones,  both  classes  of  bodies  being  intermediate 
degradation  products  of  natural  proteins  produced  by  means  of 
digestive  enzymes. 

Owing  to  the  unsatisfactory  technique  of  using  several  salts, 
Kauder,  in  1886,  for  the  first  time  carried  out  a  fractional  precipitation 
of  protein  bodies,  employing  only  one  salt,  viz.)  ammonium  sul- 
phate. This  research  was  undertaken  under  the  direction  of  Hof- 
meister,  who,  with  his  pupils,  made  valuable  contributions  during  the 
course  of  the  next  few  years  to  the  technique  and  knowledge  of  salt 
precipitation. 

Kauder  showed  that  the  globulin  precipitation  in  a  serum  solution 
commenced  when  ammonium  sulphate  is  present  to  the  extent  of 
24-29  per  cent,  of  complete  saturation,  and  ended  when  the  saturation 
amounted  to  36-46  per  cent.1  On  filtering  off  the  precipitate  thus 
produced  and  adding  fresh  quantities  of  ammonium  sulphate,  no 
further  precipitation  took  place  until  the  degree  of  saturation 
reached  about  64  per  cent.  At  this  point  the  albumin  fraction 
commenced  to  be  precipitated ;  this  precipitation  was  completed 
when  the  degree  of  saturation  reached  90  per  cent.  The  point  at 
which  precipitation  of  the  various  fractions  commences  and  ends 
varies  somewhat ;  it  depends  to  a  slight  extent  on  the  concentration 
of  the  serum  solution  employed  and  its  reaction. 

A  series  of  systematic  investigations  was  also  carried  out  in 
Hofmeister's  laboratory  with  the  object  of  determining  the  relative 
value  of  various  salt  solutions  as  precipitants.  The  following 
determinations  are  due  to  Lewith,  who  worked  with  the  serum 
proteins : — 

IV. 

Albumin  Precipitation. 
Begins.  Ends. 

33-6  47-2 


I.             II. 

III. 

Strength  of 

Salt.               Protein 

Globulin 

Precipitation. 

Solution. 

Per  Cent. 

Begins. 

Ends. 

Na2SO4  . 
(NH4)2S04 

0-98 
0-99 

11-4 
14-2 

2yi 

Na  Acetate 

2-26 

14-6 

— 

M 

0-98 

15-0 

— 

MgS04. 

0-98 

16-9 

257 

K  Acetate 

2-26 

17-6 

35*2 

M 

0-98 

22-8 

Not  estimate* 

NaCl    .J~ 

1-66 

21-8 

— 

KCI     ....',: 

1-04 

25*9 

— 

NaN03      :  . 

0-98 

46-7 

— 

NaN03 

2-26 

43-4 

— 

64-6 
60-8 


More  than  82*2 
88-1 


The  numbers  in  Columns  III.  and  IV.  express  the  amount  of  salt  in  grams  per  100 
c.c.  of  liquid.  The  strength  of  the  protein  indicates  the  percentage  in  the  mixture  after 
addition  of  the  salt  solution. 

Some  of  the  salts  in  the  above  table,  such  as  ammonium 
sulphate  and  potassium  acetate,  produce  complete  precipitation  of 
all  the  proteins  in  the  serum  solution;  others,  such  as  sodium 
chloride,  potassium  chloride  and  sodium  nitrate,  do  not  produce 
complete  precipitation  of  even  the  globulin  fraction,  when  present  to 
the  extent  of  complete  saturation. 

Hofmeister  investigated  the  relative  influence  of  the  acid  and  the 
metal  of  the  salt  on  the  power  of  precipitating  proteins.  His  results 
are  tabulated  below.  The  numbers  indicate  the  number  of  grams 

1  For  experimental  methods,  see  the  end  of  this  section. 


THE  PHYSICAL  PROPERTIES  OF  THE  PROTEINS      11 


in  100  c.c.  of  solution  when  precipitation  of  globulin  commences  in 
a  solution  of  egg-albumin,  where  the  protein  is  present  to  the  extent 
of  2  grams  in  100  c.c.  after  admixture  with  the  salt  solution. 


Sulphate 

Lithium.            Sodium. 
8-61                  n'39 

Potassium 
No  pp. 

Ammonium. 
I3'39 

Magnesium. 
I5-93 

Phosphate    . 

Not  investigated      11-69 

I3'99 

16-57 

Slightly  soluble 

Acetate 

13-83 

16-38 

No  pp. 

No  pp. 

Citrate 

14*42 

17-07 

21-99 

Not  investigated 

Tartrate 

15-11 

17-08 

25-05 

,, 

Bicarbonate  . 

No  pp. 

25-37 

Not  investigated 

»i 

Chromate 

21*22 

25-59 

No  pp. 

,, 

Chloride 

Changes  proteins    21*21 

26-28 

„ 

No  pp. 

Nitrate 
Chlorate 

Not  investigated      46*10 
58-82 

No  pp. 

ii 

Not  investigated 

ii 

Not  investigated 

It  will  be  noticed  from  the  above  table  that  the  capacity  for  pre- 
cipitation depends  on  both  the  acid  and  the  metal  of  a  salt. 

•  r  ***«•  •  /* 


The 


2-03  N. 
(NH4)aS04 

2-51-2-72  N. 
MgS04 
(NH4)2H(P04)3 
Amm.  citrate 
Amm.  tartrate 
NaHCO3 
Na3CrO4 
K2CrO4 

3-53-3-63  N 
NaCl 
KC1 

5-42-5-62  N. 
NaNO3 
NaClO3 

metals  show  a  decreasing  power  of  precipitation,  passing  from  left  to 
right  of  the  table,  whereas  the  acids  show  a  decreasing  power,  passing 
from  the  top  to  the  bottom.  The  same  result  is  obvious  when  the 
numbers  are  expressed  in  terms  of  factors  of  normal  solutions. 

FACTORS  OF  NORMAL  SOLUTIONS  NECESSARY  TO  START  PRECIPITATION  OF 

GLOBULINS. 

1-5-1-69  N. 

Li2SO4 

Na,,SO4 
Na.,HPO4 
K.,HPO4 
CH3CO2Ka 
CH3CO2N 

K  citrate 
Na  citrate 
K  tartrate 
Na  tartrate 

Some  salts  fail  entirely  to  precipitate  proteins  owing  to  their  small 
solubility  in  water.  Thus,  according  to  the  above  tables,  on  the  as- 
sumption that  the  capacity  for  precipitation  depends  both  on  the 
acid  and  the  metal,  some  concentration  between  11*39  and  13*39  Per 
cent,  of  complete  saturation  by  potassium  sulphate  should  precipitate 
globulin.  Potassium  sulphate  dissolves,  however,  only  to  the  extent 
of  1074  parts  in  100  parts  of  water  at  15'.  Similar  remarks  apply 
to  potassium  nitrate,  potassium  bicarbonate  and  potassium  chlorate. 

The  application  of  the  salt  precipitation  method  to  the  separation 
of  the  products  obtained  by  the  digestion  of  proteins  by  proteoclastic 
ferments  by  Kuhne  and  his  pupils,  Chittenden  and  Neumeister,  has 
been  mentioned  already.  They  distinguished  between  "primary" 
proteoses,  which  are  precipitable  by  sodium  chloride  or  magnesium 
sulphate,  "  secondary  "  proteoses,  which  are  precipitable  in  the  filtrate 
from  the  primary  proteoses  by  ammonium  sulphate,  and  "  peptones," 
which  cannot  be  precipitated  by  salts.  A  revision  of  this  work  was 
undertaken  in  Hofmeister's  laboratory  by  his  pupils,  Pick  and  Zunz, 
who  used  for  the  purpose  of  separation  of  fractions  varying  concen- 
trations of  one  salt  (cf.  Kauder's  researches,  p.  10).  The  former  used 
ammonium  sulphate,  and  the  latter  zinc  sulphate,  a  salt  which  had 
been  previously  employed  for  protein  precipitation  by  Bomer. 

Pick,  by  half-saturation  of  Witte's  peptone  solution  with  am- 
monium sulphate,  separated  a  so-called  hetero-  and  proto-proteose 
fraction.  From  the  filtrate  containing  the  "  secondary "  proteose 


12    THE  GENERAL  CHARACTERS  OF  THE  PROTEINS 


three  further  fractions  were  obtained,  viz. :  (i)  "  A  "  fraction,  which  is 
completely  thrown  out  by  62  per  cent,  of  complete  saturation,  and 
which  is  characterised  by  the  relatively  large  amount  of  sulphur ;  (ii) 
"  B  "  fraction,  which  is  characterised  by  the  intensity  with  which  it 
gives  the  furfurol  or  Molisch-Udransky  reaction  (see  p.  32),  and  which 
is  precipitated  by  complete  saturation  in  neutral  solution ;  and  (iii) 
"  C "  fraction,  which  is  precipitated  from  the  filtrate  from  "  B  "  by 
the  addition  of  sulphuric  acid  solution  saturated  with  ammonium 
sulphate.  By  repeated  solution  and  reprecipitation,  and  treatment  of 
the  precipitates  with  alcohol,  Pick  succeeded  in  obtaining  fractions 
which  differed  from  one  another,  not  only  in  their  solubility  and  pre- 
cipitability,  but  also  in  their  elementary  chemical  composition. 

Similar  results  have  been  obtained  by  Zunz  with  the  use  of  zinc 
sulphate. 

Another  method  of  "  salting  out "  has  been  suggested  by  Pinkus, 
who  recommends  the  saturation  of  the  solutions  with  anhydrous 
sodium  sulphate  at  37°  C. 

The  fractionation  method,  as  employed  by  Pick  and  Zunz,  has 
recently  been  subjected  to  a  critical  examination  by  Haslam. 

It  can  hardly  be  contended  that  a  process  of  the  nature  of  frac- 
tional precipitation  can  readily  produce  a  complete  separation  of 
fractions.  Two  sources  of  error  are  manifestly  a  priori  conceivable, 
viz. :  (i)  any  fraction  produced  by  a  particular  degree  of  saturation  is 
not  absolutely  insoluble  in  a  solution  of  the  strength  in  which  it  is 
precipitated  ;  (ii)  a  precipitate  may  carry  down  with  it  certain  quanti- 
ties of  substance  which  belong  to  a  subsequent  fraction.  In  a  separa- 
tion of  globulin  from  albumin,  for  example,  the  precipitate  produced 
by  half-saturation  with  ammonium  sulphate  will  consist  principally 
of  globulin,  but  it  will  contain  certain  quantities  of  albumin  ;  the  fil- 
trate, on  the  other  hand,  will  contain  mainly  albumin,  but  it  will  not 
be  entirely  free  from  globulin,  which  is  not  absolutely  insoluble  in 
half-saturated  ammonium  sulphate  solution.  Two  methods  have  been 
suggested  by  Haslam  for  testing  the  purity  of  a  fraction. 

I.  Where  it  is  sought  to  prove  that  a  protein  precipitate  is  free 
from  the  substances  of  the  filtrate. 

The  precipitate  is  dissolved  in  water  and  the  whole  made  up  to 
a  given  volume ;  the  amount  of  salt  is  added  which  is  necessary  to 
produce  the  requisite  degree  of  saturation  ;  the  mixture  after  stand- 
ing for  twenty-four  hours  is  filtered.  If  the  filtrate  contain  no 
protein,  or  other  substance  from  which  the  precipitate  is  to  be  freed, 
the  requisite  proof  is  furnished.  If  not,  the  organic  nitrogen  is 
estimated  by  Kjehldahl's  method.  The  precipitate  is  then  re- 
dissolved,  the  solution  made  up  to  the  volume  in  which  the  original 
precipitation  was  performed,  the  same  amount  of  salt  is  added,  and 
the  mixture  is  allowed  to  stand  twenty-four  hours,  and  finally  filtered. 
The  organic  nitrogen  in  the  filtrate  is  estimated.  This  process  of 
precipitation  at  constant  volume  is  repeated  until  the  nitrogen  in  the 
filtrate  is  a  constant,  i.e.,  until  only  that  amount  of  protein  is 
present  which  is  dissolved  from  the  precipitate  by  the  given  volume 
of  the  solution  of  the  degree  of  salt  saturation  in  which  the  precipita- 
tion is  carried  out.  This  process  of  precipitation  at  constant  volume 
must  generally  be  repeated  several  times  before  a  homogeneous 
precipitate  is  obtained. 


THE  PHYSICAL  PROPERTIES  OF  THE  PROTEINS     13 

II.  When  the  substance  it  is  sought  to  purify  is  in  the  filtrate 
(e.g.,  an  albumin  contaminated  with  globulin). 

In  this  case  a  process  of  fractional  precipitation  must  be  per- 
formed. By  "  fractional  precipitation  "  a  different  process  is  implied 
to  that  suggested  by  Pick.  The  method  employed  by  Haslam  may 
be  best  understood  by  giving  a  concrete  example  of  its  mode  of 
application,  viz.,  the  preparation  of  secondary  or  deutero-proteose. 
The  primary  proteoses  in  Witte's  peptone  are  first  separated  by  half- 
saturation  with  ammonium  sulphate  ;  from  the  filtrate  the  secondary 
proteoses  are  precipitated  by  adding  ammonium  sulphate  to  complete 
saturation.  This  precipitate  is  then  dissolved  in  water,  and  the 
solution  half-saturated  with  the  sulphate;  a  smaller  quantity  of 
primary  proteose  is  precipitated  than  that  obtained  in  the  first  pre- 
cipitation ;  from  the  filtrate  the  secondary  proteoses  are  precipitated 
again  by  complete  saturation  with  the  salt.  These  processes  are 
repeated  until  half-saturation  with  the  sulphate  no  longer  produces 
a  precipitate.  Even  now,  the  "secondary"  proteose  is  not  quite 
free  from  the  primary.  To  the  half-saturated  solution,  which  should 
contain  about  2  per  cent,  of  proteoses,  saturated  salt  solution  is  added 
until  a  small  precipitate  appears.  Practice  will  enable  the  operator 
to  judge  how  much  substance  it  is  best  to  precipitate  at  each  "  frac- 
tionation".  The  fraction  is  then  filtered  off,  dissolved  in  water  so 
as  to  make  approximately  a  2  per  cent,  solution,  and  to  this  is  added 
an  equal  volume  of  saturated  salt  (i.e.,  ammonium  sulphate)  solution. 
A  precipitate  of  primary  proteoses  (z>.,  the  substance  which  it  is 
desired  to  separate  off)  will  be  produced  ;  this  is  filtered  off,  and  the 
filtrate  is  returned  to  the  main  solution.  A  second  "  fraction  ' '  is  then 
taken  from  this  by  partial  precipitation ;  this  fraction  is  dissolved  in 
water  (to  make  2  per  cent,  solution  approximately),  diluted  with  an 
equal  volume  of  ammonium  sulphate  (another  precipitation  of  primary 
proteoses)  and  the  filtrate  therefrom  returned  to  the  main  solution. 
This  process  is  repeated,  a  small  quantity  of  primary  proteose  being 
removed  each  time  from  the  solution,  until  a  "  fraction  "  no  longer 
gives  a  precipitate  on  half-saturation.  The  main  solution  is  then 
completely  saturated  with  salt,  and  a  precipitate  thereby  obtained 
which  consists  of  a  nearly  pure  deutero-proteose. 

It  will  be  seen  from  the  above  descriptions  that  the  process  of 
obtaining  by  salt  precipitation  a  protein  of  constant  composition  is 
an  extremely  tedious  one,  and  it  is  highly  -probable  that  most  of 
the  proteins  obtained  by  earlier  investigators  by  the  method  of  frac- 
tional precipitation  have  been  impure. 

It  may  be  remarked  here  that  the  methods  employed  by  Haslam 
do  not  apply  only  to  precipitation  by  salt  solutions ;  fractional  pre- 
cipitation by  alcohol  of  different  strengths  may  be  carried  out  in  a 
quite  analogous  way. 

Little  detail  has  been  given  above  concerning  the  fractions  obtained 
by  different  observers  from  the  products  of  digestion  of  proteins,  such 
as  Witte's  peptone ;  this  subject,  it  is  to  be  hoped,  will  be  treated  more 
fully  in  a  monograph  on  digestion.  Neither  has  anything  been  said 
on  the  physical  processes  involved  in  the  method  of  "  salting  out "  ; 
this,  again,  is  foreign  to  the  scope  of  this  article,  and  should  be  treated 
in  the  monograph  which  deals  with  the  physics  of  colloidal  solutions. 


14    THE  GENERAL  CHARACTERS  OF  THE  PROTEINS 


Method  of  Fractional  Precipitation. 

The  limits  of  precipitability  may  be  determined  in  the  following 
way.  To  2  c.c.  of  a  protein  solution  in  a  series  of  test-tubes  are 
added  8  c.c.  of  liquid  containing  varying  quantities  of  distilled  water 
and  saturated  salt  solution.  The  limits  of  incipient  precipitation 
can  be  readily  observed.  [Pick  found  in  working  with  Witte's 
peptone  and  ammonium  sulphate  solution  that  precipitation  com- 
menced when  a  mixture  of  2*4  c.c.  saturated  ammonium  sulphate 
and  5 '6  c.c.  water  were  added  to  2  c.c.  of  a  peptone  solution.  Such 
a  solution  contains  24  per  cent,  of  the  salt  necessary  for  complete 
saturation  of  the  whole  10  c.c.  of  liquid.  In  this  case  the  initial 
limit  of  precipitation  may  be  expressed  by  the  number  24.]  The 
contents  of  the  other  test-tubes  containing  a  larger  quantity  of  am- 
monium sulphate  are  examined  by  filtering  off  the  precipitate  and 
adding  one  or  two  drops  of  the  salt  solution  to  the  filtrate ;  as  soon 
as  this  addition  no  longer  produces  a  precipitate,  the  higher  limit  of 
precipitation  is  reached.  In  dealing  with  a  mixture,  a  second  pre- 
cipitation often  commences  with  the  addition  of  larger  quantities  of 
salts.  This  can  be  readily  observed  in  the  series  of  tubes  which 
contain  a  higher  concentration,  and  the  point  is  noted  when  the 
addition  of  a  drop  of  saturated  salt  solution  to  a  filtrate  produces  a 
precipitate  again.  This  point  is  the  lower  precipitation  limit  of  a 
second  fraction.  The  higher  precipitation  limit  should  also  m  this 
case  be  noted.  A  third  fraction  can  also  be  obtained  and  its  precipita- 
tion limits  determined.  [Pick  showed  that  the  first  fraction,  which 
commenced  to  fall  out  when  the  liquid  was  24  per  cent,  saturated  (see 
above),  was.  completely  precipitated  with  42  per  cent,  saturation, 
i.e.,  the  filtrate  from  the  mixture  2  c.c.  peptone,  4'2  c.c.  ammonium 
sulphate  solution,  and  3*8  c.c.  water  just  failed  to  give  a  precipitate 
when  a  drop  of  saturated  salt  solution  was  added ;  when,  however, 
the  54  per  cent,  limit  was  reached,  the  filtrate  just  commenced  to 
give  a  precipitate  with  a  drop  of  saturated  salt  solution.  By  the 
method  three  fractions  altogether  were  obtained,  viz.y  the  24-42  per 
cent,  fraction,  the  54-62  per  cent,  fraction,  and  the  70-100  per  cent, 
fraction.] 

A  pure  protein  gives  reliable  precipitation  constants ;  attention 
must  be  called,  however,  to  the  criticisms  of  Haslam  already  outlined 
above  on  the  application  of  the  salting-out  process  to  the  separation 
of  mixtures;  as  already  noted,  it  is  a  tedious  process  to  obtain  a 
fraction  of  constant  composition  by  the  method. 

Proteins,  which  are  insoluble  in  water,  but  soluble  in  salt  solu- 
tions, have  also  their  precipitation  constants.  Osborne,  in  his  work 
on  the  plant  globulins,  extracted  his  raw  material  with  10  per  cent, 
ammonium  sulphate  solution ;  he  then  determined  the  precipitation 
limits  by  increasing  the  concentration  of  this  solution.  The  con- 
stants were  required  to  discover  whether  globulins  derived  from 
different  plants  were  identical  or  not. 

In  determining  the  precipitation  limits  with  animal  liquids,  such 
as  serum,  it  must  be  remembered  that  these  already  contain  salts  ; 
in  fact,  the  globulin  can  be  separated  from  serum  by  dialysing  these 
salts  away. 


THE  PHYSICAL  PROPERTIES  OF  THE  PROTEINS     15 

As  an  example  of  a  combined  method  of  fractional  precipitation 
by  both  alcohol  and  a  salt,  the  following,  for  the  separation  of  five 
constituents  of  Witte's  peptone  according  to  Haslam,  may  be  quoted. 
To  a  2  per  cent,  solution  of  Witte's  peptone  add  an  equal  volume  of 
alcohol  and  allow  the  mixture  to  stand  overnight,  or  at  least  for 
some  hours.  Filter,  collect  the  precipitate  and  swim  it  out  on  water. 
The  insoluble  portion  is  crude  hetero-proteose  and  may  be  filtered 
off  or  obtained  by  decantation.  The  soluble  portion  contains  a- 
proto-  and  a-deutero-proteose ;  on  half-saturation  of  the  aqueous 
solution  of  the  mixture  with  ammonium  sulphate  the  former  can 
be  precipitated  ;  the  latter  comes  down  from  the  filtrate  on  complete 
saturation.  The  /3-proto-  and  /3-deutero-proteose  remain  in  the  first 
alcoholic  filtrate.  If  the  alcohol  be  evaporated  off  at  a  low  tempera- 
ture and  the  solution  made  up  to  its  original  volume,  and  the  liquid 
thus  obtained  be  half-saturated  with  ammonium  sulphate,  /2-proto- 
proteose  is  precipitated ;  by  completely  saturating  the  filtrate  the 
/3-deutero-proteose  can  be  obtained.  By  performing  the  precipita- 
tions twice  purer  products  can  be  obtained. 

SECTION  II. — THE  DEGREE  OF  SOLUBILITY  OF  PROTEINS  IN 
SALT  SOLUTIONS. 

In  experiments  on  "  salting  out,"  the  precipitation  limits  have 
almost  always  been  determined  in  solutions  containing  but  a  small 
amount  of  protein ;  even  when  so  much  salt  has  been  added  that  no 
further  precipitation  takes  place,  the  solution  may  still  contain  a 
certain  amount  of  protein,  owing  to  the  fact  that  the  latter  is  not 
absolutely  insoluble.  But  little  work  has  been  done  so  far  in  the 
determination  of  this  degree  of  solubility ;  the  most  instructive  is 
that,  perhaps,  of  Osborne  and  Harris  on  the  solubility  of  plant 
globulins  in  salts  of  various  concentrations  ;  in  this  case  the  results 
are  of  interest  owing  to  the  fact  that  the  protein  itself  is  insoluble  in 
pure  water.  These  investigators  found  that  there  were  two  classes 
of  globulin  solvents,  viz. :  (i)  those  in  which  a  relatively  considerable 
quantity  of  salt  must  be  present  before  notable  quantities  of  globulin 
commence  to  dissolve,  and  from  which  it  is  precipitated  by  dilution 
with  much  water,  or  by  the  addition  of  small  quantities  of  strong 
acids,  and  (ii)  those  in  which  solution  is  brought  about  by  low 
concentrations  of  salt  from  which  the  protein  is  not  precipitated 
by  dilution  with  water  or  by  acids.  The  first  class  includes  solutions 
of  the  salts  of  strong  bases  with  strong  acids,  the  second  the  solution 
of  salts  of  weak  bases. 

The  degree  of  solution  is  considerably  influenced  in  the  case 
of  the  globulin  edestin  by  the  presence  of  small  quantities  of 
acids  and  bases ;  this  subject  will,  however,  be  discussed  in  greater 
detail  later  in  considering  the  action  of  acids  and  bases  on  pro- 
teins. The  behaviour  of  edestin  towards  acetate  solutions  is  ano- 
malous. Although  it  is  insoluble  in  solutions  of  potassium,  sodium 
and  ammonium  acetate,  it  is  soluble  in  the  acetates  of  barium, 
strontium,  calcium  and  magnesium  ;  the  solubility  in  these  ace- 
tates is  in  the  order  of  their  molecular  weights.  In  solutions  of 
silver,  copper  and  lead  acetates  it  is  nearly  as  soluble  as  in  solutions 
of  free  acids  of  corresponding  concentration ;  the  positive  ion  enters 


16    THE  GENERAL  CHARACTERS  OF  THE  PROTEINS 

into  combination  with  the  edestin  and  no  longer  remains  a  free  ion 
in  solution.  Acetates  of  zinc  and  mercury  have  no  solvent  action. 

The  solubility  of  serum-globulin  in  salt  solutions  has  been  in- 
vestigated by  J.  Mellanby.  He  found  that  the  amount  of  globulin 
dissolved  by  a  neutral  salt  depends  upon  the  percentage  of  protein 
present  and  not  upon  the  total  quantity  of  salt.  If  a  suspension  of 
globulin  be  treated  with  a  salt  solution  of  given  percentage,  the 
amount  of  the  protein  dissolved  will  depend  upon  the  strength  of 
the  suspension  ;  more  protein,  for  example,  will  be  dissolved  from  a 
5  per  cent,  suspension  treated  with  a  given  quantity  of  salt  solution 
than  would  be  dissolved  if  the  same  quantity  of  a  2  per  cent,  sus- 
pension be  treated  in  the  same  way.  With  regard  to  the  solution 
capacity  of  various  salts,  he  found  that  neutral  salts  with  monovalent 
ions  have  the  same  efficiency ;  those  composed  of  a  monovalent 
positive  ion  and  a  divalent  negative  ion,  or  of  a  divalent  positive 
and  monovalent  negative  ion  have  also  the  same  efficiency  as  one 
another.  The  salts  of  this  latter  class  have  a  greater  efficiency  than 
those  of  the  former.  Mellanby  concludes  that  the  solution  of  glob- 
ulins by  neutral  salts  depends  upon  the  forces  exerted  by  the  ions ; 
that  monovalent  ions,  whether  negative  or  positive,  are  equally  effective 
in  producing  solutions ;  that  divalent  ions,  whether  negative  or  posi- 
tive, are  also  equally  effective,  but  more  effective  than  monovalent 
ions. 

Another  view  as  to  the  solution  of  globulins  by  salts  is  that  a 
molecular  compound  of  the  type  GBS  (G  =  globulin,  B  =  base, 
S  =  acid)  is  formed,  which  is  readily  hydrolysed  by  water,  with  the 
liberation  of  insoluble  globulin : — 

GBS  +  H2O  =  GHOH  +  BS. 

Such  molecular  compounds  would  be  stable,  therefore,  only  in  pre- 
sence of  a  large  excess  of  the  salt  (Hardy). 

In  the  present  state  of  knowledge  but  little  can  be  said  with 
certainty  as  to  the  nature  of  the  solution  of  those  proteins  in  salt 
solutions,  which  are  insoluble  in  pure  water. 

SECTION  III. — SOLUBILITY  OF  PROTEINS  IN  ORGANIC  SOLVENTS. 

Some  peptones  and  proteoses,  as  has  been  already  mentioned, 
are  soluble  in  alcohol.  Certain  proteins  of  plant  origin  are  insoluble 
in  water  and  absolute  alcohol,  but  soluble  in  dilute  alcohol.  Bodies 
of  this  class  have  been  subjected  to  an  exhaustive  examination 
chiefly  by  Ritthausen,  and  by  Osborne  and  his  co-workers.  A 
typical  protein  of  this  class  is  the  gliadin  obtained  from  wheat. 
These  bodies  are  generally  soluble  in  some  other  organic  solvents ; 
zein,  for  example,  the  alcohol-soluble  protein  from  maize,  will  dissolve 
in  glacial  acetic  acid,  in  crystallised  phenol  on  warming  and  in 
glycerol.  In  water  and  absolute  alcohol  it  is  perfectly  insoluble  ;  it 
is  most  soluble  in  alcohol  of  85-95  per  cent.,  and  is  but  little  soluble 
in  alcohol  of  less  than  50  per  cent. 

Mayer  and  Terroine  have  recently  made  a  curious  observation 
with  reference  to  the  alcohol  solubility  of  proteins.  They  have  shown 
that  certain  proteins  which  have  been  precipitated  from  a  dialysed 
aqueous  solution  by  alcohol  acquire  the  property  of  redissolving  in 


THE  PHYSICAL  PROPERTIES  OF  THE  PROTEINS     17 

strengths  of  even  80-85  per  cent,  on  the  addition  of  small  quantities 
of  salts.  The  albumin  of  horse  serum  can  be  redissolved  under 
these  circumstances  by  the  addition  of  acids,  bases  or  salts.  If  the 
horse  serum  be  not  dialysed  before  precipitation  with  alcohol,  re- 
solution in  alcohol  only  takes  place  on  the  addition  of  acid  or 
fairly  strong  alkalies.  The  dissolved  serum-albumin  does  not  lose 
its  original  properties.  Egg-albumin,  even  when  dialysed,  acquires 
the  property  of  being  redissolved  in  alcohol  wholly,  by  addition  of 
bases,  partially,  by  addition  of  acids,  and  not  at  all,  by  addition  of 
salts.  Nothing  is  known  of  the  causes  of  these  phenomena. 

Many  proteins  are  also  soluble  in  urea  solutions  (Ramsden)  and 
also  in  organic  bases.  This  solubility  is  due  probably  to  their  acidic 
nature.  Globulins,  caseinogen,  acid-  and  alkali-albumin  and  even 
heat-coagulated  proteins  dissolve  in  a  saturated  aqueous  solution  of 
pure  urea.  Dry  gelatin  dissolves  at  room  temperature  till  a  40  per 
cent,  solution  is  obtained.  If  the  urea  be  removed  by  dialysis,  the 
gelatin  sets  to  a  jelly  again.  The  presence  of  urea,  furthermore,  pre- 
vents coagulation  of  solutions. 

SECTION  IV. — SEPARATION  OF  PROTEINS  FROM  SOLUTION  BY 
PRECIPITANTS  OTHER  THAN  SALTS. 

Michaelis  and  Rona  have  recently  suggested  a  new  precipitant  for 
proteins.  When  an  alcoholic  solution  of  gum-mastic  is  added  to 
water  an  emulsion  is  formed,  which,  on  addition  of  salts,  is  de-emul- 
sified with  the  formation  of  a  flocculent  precipitate.  If  proteins  be 
present  in  the  emulsion  colloidal  particles  will  be  obtained,  consisting 
both  of  the  mastic  and  the  protein.  If  the  former  be  in  sufficient 
excess  the  whole  of  the  latter  will  be  carried  down,  when  sufficient 
electrolyte  (e.g.,  hydrochloric  acid)  has  been  added  to  de-emulsify  the 
solution.  The  action  is  irreversible,  in  that  the  protein  cannot  be 
dissolved  out  from  the  precipitate  by  water.  On  treatment,  however, 
with  organic  solvents,  the  mastic  can  be  dissolved  ;  if  ether  be  used 
as  a  solvent  hardly  any  nitrogenous  matter  goes  into  solution ;  with 
chloroform  or  alcohol,  on  the  other  hand,  very  appreciable  quantities 
of  nitrogenous  matter  are  dissolved.  The  method  has  the  disadvan- 
tage when  applied  to  the  separation  of  many  proteins,  in  that  the 
latter,  when  the  attempt  is  made  to  recover  them  by  means  of  ether, 
are  rendered  insoluble  (coagulated),  and  thus  cannot  be  obtained  in 
their  original  form.  The  mastic  can  also  partially  precipitate  pro- 
teose  ;  in  the  case  of  a  commercial  peptone  obtained  from  fibrin,  Rona 
and  Michaelis  found  about  88  per  cent,  of  the  nitrogen  in  the  filtrate, 
the  remainder  being  precipitated  by  the  mastic.  They  suggest  the 
employment  of  the  method  for  the  separation  of  proteoses.  In  this 
case  the  mastic  can  be  separated  from  the  precipitated  proteose 
without  altering  this  substance.  In  solutions  containing  coagulable 
protein,  such  as  serum,  the  method  may  be  of  use  in  estimating  the 
non-protein  constituents,  such  as  urea,  nitrogenous  extractives  and 
sugar,  which  are  not  carried  down  by  the  mastic  precipitate. 

This  method  is,  so  far,  new.  Owing  to  the  irreversibility  it  does 
not  seem  as  if  it  will  be  capable  of  such  general  application  as  the 
salt-precipitation  method  for  the  isolation  of  proteins  ;  its  chief  use  is 
for  freeing  solutions  from  proteins  for  the  subsequent  examination  of 


i8    THE  GENERAL  CHARACTERS  OF  THE  PROTEINS 

> 

substances  not  precipitated.  Certain  inorganic  bodies  which  readily 
adsorb  proteins  have  also  been  suggested  for  the  removal  of  the  latter 
from  solution.  These  inorganic  adsorbents  have  been  investigated 
by  Landsteiner  and  Uhlirz,  who  found  that  the  most  effective  sub- 
stances were  precipitated  silicic  acid,  meerschaum  and  iron  oxide. 
Two  grams  of  these  powders,  shaken  with  20  c.c.  of  0*25  per  cent, 
solutions  of  proteins,  can  remove  the  whole  of  the  latter  from  solution. 
The  more  readily  a  protein  is  precipitated  by  salts  the  more  easily  is 
it  adsorbed  by  these  non-crystalline  powders. 

Method. 

It  has  already  been  stated  that  the  mastic  emulsion  should  be  in 
large  excess.  In  the  case  of  liquids  rich  in  protein,  such  as  serum,  a 
preliminary  precipitation  with  alcohol  can  be  carried  out,  or  the 
mastic  can  be  added  in  portions  at  a  time.  The  following  example 
will  illustrate  the  method  : — 

One  volume  of  serum  is  mixed  with  three  volumes  of  alcohol. 
After  separating  the  precipitate,  one  volume  of  a  50  per  cent,  solu- 
tion of  mastic  in  absolute  alcohol  is  added  and  the  mixture  is  then 
diluted  with  water  till  the  alcohol  does  not  form  more  than  30  per 
cent,  of  the  total  fluid.  The  liquid  is  then,  just  acidified  with  acetic 
acid,  and  10  per  cent,  magnesium  sulphate  solution  is  added,  10-15 
c.c.  being  employed  for  each  litre  of  the  solution.  The  precipitated 
mastic  will  then  carry  down  the  last  traces  of  the  protein  remaining 
in  solution. 

SECTION  V.— CRYSTALLISATION  OF  PROTEINS. 

Proteins,  as  colloidal  bodies,  were  at  one  time  thought  to  be 
incapable  of  existing  in  crystalline  form.  Later  investigations  have 
shown,  however,  that  this  is  not  the  case,  and  the  elaboration  of 
methods  for  the  crystallisation  of  certain  substances  of  this  class  must 
be  considered  as  a  distinct  advance  in  the  chemical  technique  for  the 
preparation  of  pure  substances. 

Crystalline  bodies  of  a  protein  character  were  first  observed  in 
plants  where  they  occur  naturally.  They  were  known  as  "  aleurone  " 
grains,  and  were  first  noticed  in  gluten  by  Th.  Hartig  in  1850.  Their 
protein  character  was  first  demonstrated  by  Radlkofer  in  1858.  They 
occur  in  the  seeds  of  a  large  number  of  plants,  such  as  the  pumpkin, 
in  hemp  seeds,  in  castor-oil  seeds,  and  in  Brazil  nuts. 

In  some  respects  these  aleurone  grains  differ  from  ordinary  crys- 
tals. They  can,  for  example,  imbibe  water  and  swell,  during  which 
process  they  lose  to  some  extent  their  capacity  for  refracting  light ; 
they  retain,  however,  their  original  contours.  The  increase  in  size,  as 
determined  by  accurate  measurement  by  Schimper,  is  not  the  same 
in  every  axis.  Another  peculiarity  is  that  aleurone  grains  will  par- 
tially dissolve  on  treatment  with  glycerine,  and  an  undissolved  portion 
will  be  obtained  which  still  retains  the  original  crystalline  contour, 
but  which  has  nearly  the  same  refractive  index  as  water. 

These  peculiarities  have  caused  the  question  to  be  raised  as  to 
whether  these  bodies  are  true  crystals. 

Similar  naturally  occurring  protein  crystals  have  also  been  de- 
scribed in  animal  organisms,  notably  in  the  intestinal  epithelium  of 
meal-worms  and  in  the  eggs  of  certain  fish  and  amphibia.  These 


THE  PHYSICAL  PROPERTIES  OF  THE  PROTEINS     19 

latter  bodies  have  been  designated  "  yolk-platelets,"  and  have  formed 
the  subject  of  an  exhaustive  investigation  by  Fremy  and  Valenciennes. 
They  are  possibly  lecitho-proteins  (Walther).  Finally  may  be  men- 
tioned the  haemoglobin  crystals,  which  are  not  observed  normally 
in  the  animal  body,  but  are  occasionally  found  in  preparations,  and 
are  sometimes  formed  as  the  result  of  post-mortem  changes. 

The  first  results  in  the  artificial  preparation  of  protein  crystals  were 
obtained  by  Maschke  (1859),  wno  evaporated  a  saturated  solution  of 
aleurone  grains  from  Brazil  nuts  and  obtained  tabular,  hexagonal 
crystals.  In  1877  Schmiedeberg  succeeded  in  recrystal Using  aleu- 
rone grains,  which  were  also  obtained  from  Brazil  nuts.  He  dissolved 
the  bodies  in  water  at  3O°-35°  and  precipitated  them  from  this 
solution  by  means  of  a  current  of  carbonic  acid  gas.  The  precipitate 
was  then  redissolved  in  water  at  3O°-35°  with  the  addition  of  an  ex- 
cess of  magnesia  ;  on  allowing  this  solution  to  evaporate  at  the  same 
temperature  a  certain  number  of  large  crystals  were  obtained,  which 
Schmiedeberg  regarded  as  the  magnesium  compound  of  the  protein. 

The  preparation  of  crystalline  proteins  from  plants  formed,  during 
the  next  two  decades,  the  subject  of  a  large  number  of  memoirs,  the 
chief  of  which  are  due  to  Ritthausen,  and  to  Osborne  and  his  co- 
workers.  The  plant  globulins,  to  which  class  most  of  these  crystalline 
substances  belong,  are,  it  must  be  recalled,  insoluble  in  water  but 
soluble  in  salt  solutions ;  by  allowing  the  proteins  to  separate  from  these 
solutions  under  suitable  conditions  the  crystalline  substances  may  be 
obtained.  The  following  method  of  preparation  of  edestin,  due  to 
Osborne  and  modified  by  Leipziger,  may  serve  as  an  example : — 

One  kilogram  of  hemp  seed  is  ground,  or  pressed  in  an  oil-press 
(a  Buchner  press  can  be  employed  when  available).  The  remainder  of 
the  fat  is  then  removed  by  extracting  with  light  petroleum.  When 
free  from  this  solvent  the  seeds  are  digested  at  60°  with  I  litre  of 
5  per  cent,  salt  solution,  and  the  mixture  is  kept  continually  stirred. 
The  liquid  is  then  filtered  off  from  the  residue  through  calico  and 
allowed  to  cool.  A  precipitate  forms  and  settles  at  the  bottom  of 
the  vessel.  The  supernatant  liquid  is  then  decanted  off  and  the 
precipitate  washed  by  decantation  with  distilled  water.  It  is  then  re- 
dissolved  in  500  c.c.  of  5  per  cent,  salt  solution,  and  the  solution  filtered 
through  a  warm  filter.  On  cooling  beautiful  crystals  separate.  These 
are  washed  with  cold  5  per  cent,  salt  solution,  distilled  water,  alcohol 
and  ether.  Yield  about  100  grams. 

In  the  cases  of  plant  crystals,  substances  have  been  obtained  in  the 
laboratory  in  a  crystalline  form,  which  can  exist  in  such  form  in 
nature. 

A  further  great  advance  was  made  in  1889,  when  Hofmeister 
described  the  preparation  of  a  crystalline  albumin  from  white  of  egg  ; 
this  was  the  first  instance  of  the  isolation  in  crystalline  form  of 
a  protein  which  was  not  known  to  exist  in  this  form  in  nature. 
Not  long  afterwards,  Giirber  and  Michel  succeeded  in  obtaining  a 
crystalline  albumin  from  horse  serum.  Hofmeister  mixed  egg-white 
with  an  equal  volume  of  saturated  ammonium  sulphate ;  the  globulin 
was  thereby  precipitated ;  on  allowing  the  filtrate  from  this  to 
evaporate  slowly  in  an  open  basin,  the  albumin  separated  in  the  form 
of  so-called  globulites  or  spherolites.  These  were  redissolved  in  dilute 
ammonium  sulphate,  and  the  solution  was  allowed  to  slowly  evaporate 


20    THE  GENERAL  CHARACTERS  OF  THE  PROTEINS 

i 

as  before.  On  a  second  recrystallisation,  needles  were  obtained 
mixed  with  the  spherolites ;  on  repeating  the  crystallisation  a  suffi- 
cient number  of  times,  a  product  consisting  entirely  of  needles  was 
obtained. 

The  original  method  of  Hofmeister  has  been  modified  in  various 
ways.  It  has  been  shown  that  ammonium  sulphate  solution  con- 
taining protein  becomes  alkaline  on  standing ;  Hopkins  and  Pinkus 
have  shown  that  the  addition  of  acid  facilitates  very  considerably 
the  process  of  crystallisation.  The  method  as  modified  by  these 
investigators  is  the  one  now  in  general  use  and  is  carried  out  in  the 
following  way : — 

Egg-white  is  beaten  to  a  froth  (to  break  up  the  membranes)  with 
exactly  its  own  bulk  of  ammonium  sulphate  solution.  The  mixture, 
after  standing  overnight,  or  at  least  for  a  few  hours,  is  filtered  from 
the  precipitated  protein.  The  filtrate  is  now  measured.  Ten  per 
cent,  acetic  acid  (glacial  acetic  acid  diluted  to  ten  times  its  bulk)  is 
then  very  gradually  added  from  a  burette,  until  a  well-marked 
precipitate  forms — a  precipitate  sufficient  to  make  the  mixture 
actually  milky  in  appearance,  and  not  a  mere  opalescence  for  which 
liberated  gas  bubbles  might  be  mistaken.  Trie  actual  amount  of 
acid  required  to  produce  such  a  precipitate  will  vary  (chiefly  because 
of  the  varying  loss  of  ammonia  which  occurs  when  the  liquid  has 
previously  stood  in  open  vessels).  The  point  corresponds  roughly 
to  an  incipient  acidity  of  the  liquid  towards  litmus,  but  the  formation 
of  the  precipitate  forms  of  itself  the  best  indicator.  This  stage 
being  reached,  a  measured  quantity  of  the  acid  is  now  added,  over 
and  above  that  required  to  produce  the  first  precipitate,  I  c.c.  being 
added  for  each  100  c.c.  of  the  filtered  mixture  as  originally 
measured.  The  whole  contains,  therefore,  approximately  i  part  per 
thousand  of  free  acid.  The  bulky  precipitate  thus  produced  is  at 
first  amorphous,  and  if  the  mixture  be  occasionally  shaken  the 
amorphous  precipitate  will  give  place  to  crystals  within  four  or  five 
hours.  To  obtain  the  full  yield,  however,  the  material  should  stand 
for  twenty-four  hours.  The  product  thus  obtained  is  already  nearly 
pure.  'On  recrystallising  once  more  from  ammonium  sulphate 
(dissolving  in  water,  and  then  carefully  adding  half-saturated 
ammonium  sulphate  containing  acetic  acid  in  the  proportion  of  i 
per  thousand,  till  a  permanent  precipitate  forms,  and  then  about 
2  c.c.  of  ammonium  sulphate  per  litre  in  excess  of  this)  a  perfectly 
pure  preparation  is  obtained. 

Considerable  difficulty  has  been  experienced  in  obtaining  serum- 
albumin  in  a  crystalline  form.  Formerly  it  was  obtained  almost 
entirely  from  the  blood  of  the  horse,  but  even  here  the  attempt  to 
obtain  a  crystalline  preparation  does  not  always  meet  with  success. 
In  these  cases  Giirber's  method  was  employed.  The  serum  was 
mixed  with  an  equal  volume  of  concentrated  ammonium  sulphate 
solution  ;  then,  to  the  filtrate  from  the  precipitated  globulin,  ammo- 
nium sulphate  solution  was  added  until  there  was  an  incipient 
turbidity;  on  allowing  the  mixture  to  stand  the  serum-albumin 
crystals  separated.  Inagaki  has  recently  shown  that  crystalline 
serum-albumin  can  be  readily  obtained  by  the  Hopkins  and  Pinkus' 
method,  i.e.,  in  the  presence  of  free  acid.  Crystallisation  also  takes 
place  more  readily  at  a  somewhat  higher  temperature  (35°-4O°).  The 


THE  PHYSICAL  PROPERTIES  OF  THE  PROTEINS     21 

crystals  obtained  are,  according  to  Inagaki,  compounds  of  protein 
with  sulphuric  acid. 

It  is  possible  that  the  other  crystalline  proteins  are  also  compounds 
with  acids.  This  subject  will  be  reconsidered  later,  in  discussing 
the  action  of  acids  and  bases  on  proteins. 

A  special  case  of  protein  crystallisation  is  that  of  haemoglobin. 
This  is  a  conjugated  protein,  i.e.,  it  is  a  compound  of  a  protein  and  a 
chromatogenic  group,  and  its  power  of  crystallisation  depends  on  the 
presence  of  this  group.  Crystals  can  be  obtained  by  the  following 
method,  due  chiefly  to  Zinoffsky  and  modified  by  Abderhalden. 

The  paste  of  red  blood  corpuscles  (from  a  horse),  after  separating 
from  the  serum  and  washing,  is  mixed  with  twice  its  volume  of 
water  and  the  mixture  is  then  warmed  to  35°.  The  corpuscles  are 
by  this  treatment  laked.  A  very  small  known  quantity  of  ammonia 
is  then  added  to  dissolve  the  stromata,  and  then  hydrochloric  acid 
in  very  dilute  solution  is  added  in  such  quantity  as  to  exactly 
neutralise  the  ammonia.  The  mixture  is  then  cooled  to  o°,  and  one- 
quarter  the  volume  of  absolute  alcohol  is  added.  The  whole  is  kept 
on  ice,  and  crystals  slowly  separate  out,  and  settle  at  the  bottom  of  the 
vessel.  The  supernatant  liquid  is  then  poured  off,  and  the  crystals 
are  washed  by  decantation  with  a  mixture  of  one  part  alcohol  and 
four  parts  of  water  previously  cooled  to  o°.  They  can  be  recrys- 
tallised  by  dissolving  the  crystalline  paste  in  twice  its  volume  of 
water  at  35°,  then  cooling  to  o°,  adding  one-quarter  the  volume  of 
alcohol,  and  allowing  the  crystals  to  form  slowly  at  a  low  temperature. 

It  must  be  remembered  that  only  a  relatively  small  number  of 
proteins  have  as  yet  been  obtained  in  crystalline  form,  and  recrystalli- 
sation  as  a  mode  of  purification  has,  so  far,  not  obtained  a  very  wide 
application.  It  is  not  known  whether  any  chemical  change  takes 
place  during  the  process,  and  there  is  a  certain  amount  of  evidence 
that  in  the  case  of  crystallised  egg-albumin,  for  instance,  the  cry- 
stallised product  is  different  from  the  original  protein  existing  in 
the  egg-white  (see  "  gold  number  "  of  crystallised  and  non-crystallised 
egg-albumin,  p.  27). 

SECTION  VI.— THE  TEMPERATURE  OF  HEAT  COAGULATION  OF 
PROTEIN  SOLUTIONS. 

In  1854  Kiihne  noticed  that  there  were  two  proteins  present  in 
muscle-plasma  which  differed  in  the  temperature  of  heat  coagulation, 
and  since  that  time  the  coagulation  point  has  been  regarded  as  an 
important  factor  for  distinguishing  between  proteins,  and  the  process 
of  separating  proteins  in  mixtures  by  means  of  a  fractional  heat 
coagulation  has  been  repeatedly  employed.  In  this  operation  a 
solution  of  the  mixture  is  heated  to  a  definite  temperature  until 
a  coagulum  is  produced ;  this  is  filtered  off,  and  the  filtrate  heated 
to  a  still  higher  temperature,  when  there  is  the  formation  of 
another  coagulum ;  further  fractions  can  be  taken  until  no  more 
coagulable  protein  remains  in  solution.  Thus  Halliburton,  by  such  a 
process,  separated  in  1887  several  proteins  from  muscle-plasma,  which 
he  designated  as  follows  :  paramyosinogen,  coagulating  at  47° ;  myo- 
sinogen,  coagulating  at  56° ;  myoglobin,  coagulating  at  63° ;  all  of  which 
can  be  precipitated  from  solution  on  saturation  with  sodium  chloride 


22    THE  GENERAL  CHARACTERS  OF  THE  PROTEINS 

and  magnesium  sulphate  ;  in  addition  to  these  an  albumin  coagulating 
at  73°  was  obtained,  which  cannot  be  so  precipitated. 

Other  coagulation  points  were  determined  by  Fre"dericq. 

It  is  not  in  the  least  probable  that  such  a  process  as  fractional 
coagulation  can  lead  to  a  complete  separation  of  a  mixture  of  pro- 
teins ;  it  is,  moreover,  irreversible,  and  in  this  respect  cannot  have 
such  a  general  application  as,  e.g.,  the  separation  by  means  of  salt 
precipitation. 

It  remains  to  be  considered,  however,  how  far  the  coagulation 
temperature  may  be  regarded  as  a  constant  characteristic  of  any 
individual  protein.  (NOTE. — All  proteins  do  not  form  heat-coagulable 
solutions.)  It  was  long  ago  observed  that  the  reaction  of  the  liquid 
and  the  presence  of  neutral  salts  exercised  a  marked  influence  on 
the  coagulation  temperature.  In  the  case  of  natural  fluids,  such  as 
muscle-plasma,  serum,  etc.,  which  contain  salts,  it  was  noticed  that 
the  coagulation  took  place  more  readily  in  a  slightly  acid  solution ; 
the  presence  of  larger  quantities  of  acids,  however,  inhibited  the 
coagulation,  owing  to  the  formation  of  acid  albumin.  In  the  experi- 
ments of  Halliburton,  already  referred  to,  the  fractional  coagulation 
was  carried  out  with  solutions  having  a  certain  definite  acidity. 

The  influence  of  salts  was  recognised  by  Aronstein  (1874),  who 
showed  that  a  solution  of  egg-white,  from  which  inorganic  matter 
had  been  almost  completely  removed  by  dialysis,  lost  its  coagula- 
bility. Subsequent  researches  were  undertaken  by  Alexander 
Schmidt  and  Heynsius,  and  it  was  found  that  the  protein  solutions 
of  Aronstein  still  contained  alkali,  although  the  neutral  salts  had 
dialysed  away.  Heynsius  made  the  further  observation  that  by 
very  long-continued  dialysis,  by  means  of  which  nearly  all  the  alkali 
is  removed,  a  solution  is  obtained  which  recovers  its  coagulability ; 
the  coagulation  in  this  solution  is  inhibited,  however,  by  the  pre- 
sence of  minute  quantities  of  acids  and  alkalis.  Similar  results  were 
obtained  by  Winogradoff  and  Haas. 

The  capacity  for  coagulation  of  a  solution  depends,  therefore, 
both  on  its  reaction  and  the  quantity  of  neutral  salts  present;  the 
smaller  the  quantity  of  the  latter,  the  smaller  the  amount  of  alkali 
necessary  to  inhibit  coagulation. 

Careful  quantitative  studies  on  the  influence  of  salts  on  the  tem- 
perature of  coagulation  have  been  undertaken  by  Starke  and  by 
Pauli,  the  latter  of  whom  has  endeavoured  by  his  researches  to  throw 
some  light  on  the  chemico-physical  process  involved  in  the  coagulation 
of  colloids. 

Starke  determined  the  amount  of  various  neutral  salts  that  were 
necessary  to  restore  the  coagulability  of  a  protein  solution,  which  had 
been  deprived  of  this  property  by  dialysis.  He  found  that  in  the 
case  of  the  salts  of  alkaline  earths  and  magnesium,  a  few  milligrams 
per  100  c.c.  of  solution  sufficed,  whereas  with  the  alkaline  salts  I 
gram  per  100  c.c.  was  required.  Starke  also  investigated  the  in- 
fluence of  varying  quantities  of  different  salts  on  the  temperature  of 
coagulation.  This  question  was  the  subject  of  a  more  exhaustive 
investigation  by  Pauii.  The  following  table,  which  is  one  out  of  a 
large  number  to  be  found  in  Pauli's  earlier  paper,  illustrates  the  in- 
fluence of  varying  quantities  of  different  salts  on  a  certain  solution 
of  egg-white.  In  all  cases  2  c.c.  of  the  egg-white  solution  were 


THE  PHYSICAL  PROPERTIES  OF  THE  PROTEINS     23 

diluted  to  10  c.c. ;  the  numbers  in  the  first  horizontal  line  indicate 
the  number  of  cubic  centimetres  of  normal  solutions  of  various  salts 
contained  in  the  10  c.c. 

INFLUENCE  OF  VARIOUS  CHLORIDES  ON  COAGULATION  POINT. 


c.c. 

0'5 

ro 

i'5 

2'O 

2-5 

3-o 

3'5 

4-0 

4'5 

5'0 

5'5 

6-0 

NH4 

57'2 

58-2 

59-i 

60*0 

60-3 

60-5 

607 

6ro 









K 

60-9 

6r6 

61-9 

62*2 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

Na 

61-8 

62-6 

6V4 

64-2 

64-5 

63-6 

62-4 

60-0 

— 

— 

— 

— 

Li 

62-0 

64-6 

68-2 

7i'3 

72-6 

73*2 

72*6 

71-7 

70-8 

68-0 

62-8 

59'8 

Ba 

60-9 

67-8 

7r5 

7I-5 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

Mg 

60-9 

70-8 

75'2 

75*2 

76-2 

77-8 

78-2 

78-8 

*—  * 

~ 

~ 

It  will  be  seen  from  the  above  table  that  the  increase  in  the 
quantity  of  salt  raises  the  coagulation  temperature  up  to  a  certain 
point,  after  which,  in  some  cases,  further  additions  of  salts  cause  no 
increase,  and  in  other  cases  even  a  diminution. 

It  is  not  necessary  here  to  discuss  the  physical  meaning  of  such 
numbers  as  these  ;  enough  has  been  said  to  indicate  that  the  coagula- 
tion temperature  is  a  constant  which  is  markedly  influenced  by  a 
variety  of  factors.  The  chief  ones  are,  as  Starke  pointed  out :  (i)  the 
reaction  of  the  solution,  (ii)  the  amount  of  neutral  salts  present,  in  a 
minor  degree  (iii)  the  concentration  of  the  protein,  and  (iv)  the  rate  at 
which  the  solution  is  heated.  Far  less  reliance  can  be  placed  on  co- 
agulation temperatures  as  a  constant  for  identification  of  proteins  than 
on  such  a  constant  as  the  melting  point  of  a  crystalline  substance, 
especially  when  it  is  remembered  that  it  is  often  difficult  to  exactly 
regulate  the  amount  of  salt,  acid  or  alkali  present  in  any  given 
solution.1 

Method  (according  to  Pauli). 

The  liquid  to  be  tested  is  placed  in  a  test-tube,  provided  with  a 
stirrer,  and  in  it  is  immersed  a  thermometer  graduated  in  -^  or  T2o  de- 
grees. The  test-tube  is  immersed  in  water  in  a  beaker  of  I  litre 
capacity,  which  is  likewise  provided  with  a  thermometer  and  stirrer. 
The  whole  is  slowly  heated  with  a  small  burner,  the  liquid  in  both 
test-tube  and  beaker  being  carefully  stirred,  so  that  both  vessels  attain 
the  same  temperature.  When  there  is  a  black  background  and  the 
apparatus  receives  light  from  two  sides  the  smallest  turbidity  is  readily 
recognised.  The  time  a  solution  takes  to  coagulate  should  also  be 
noticed ;  this  factor  bears  no  relation  to  the  coagulation  tempera- 
ture. 


1  Wolfgang  Ostwald  has  recently  represented  the  relation  between  the  amount  of 
salt  present  and  the  coagulation  temperature  by  the  following  equation —  -^  =  kcm  where 

t  =  temperature,  c  salt  concentration,  and  k  and  m  are  constants.  He  draws  attention  to 
the  similarity  between  this  and  an  adsorption  equation.  Pauli,  in  some  very  recent 
work,  comes  to  the  conclusion  that  the  coagulation  point  is  influenced  by  the  condensa- 
tion of  ions  on  the  surface  of  the  colloidal  particles. 

3 


24    THE  GENERAL  CHARACTERS  OF  THE  PROTEINS 


TABLE. 

COAGULATION  TEMPERATURES  OF  SOME  OF  THE  PRINCIPAL  PROTEINS. 


Substance. 

Temperature. 

Observer. 

Remarks. 

Bence-Jones'  protein     . 

50-530 

Magnus-Levy 

Passes  again  into 

solution  on  fur- 

ther heating. 

Caseinogen   . 
Crystallin  (a) 

94-100° 
72° 

Lacqueur&Sackur 
Morner 

Heated  dry. 

>»          (ft) 

63° 

it 

Egg-albumin 

56° 

Starke 

Fibrinogen    . 

56° 

Fredericq 

Haemoglobin 

64° 

Preyer 

Lact-globulin 

72° 

Hewlett 

(  Paramyosinogen 

47° 

Halliburton 

Cf.  von  Fiirth. 

Muscle  proteins  j  Myosinogen 

56° 

n 

(Myoglobulin 

63° 

|f 

t  .       f  Globulin   . 
Serum  proteins  {Albumin    . 

75° 
67° 

Hammarsten 
Fredericq 

Cf.  Freund  and 
Joachim. 

Vitellin          .... 

75° 

Weyl 

Observer. 


SECTION  VII. — OPTICAL  ROTATION  OF  PROTEIN  SOLUTIONS. 

Solutions  of  proteins  are  optically  active.  The  rotations,  like 
those  of  the  amino-acids,  vary  according  to  the  amount  of  acid 
present  in  solution.  The  number  of  reliable  determinations  of  the 
optical  rotation  of  protein  solutions  is  small.  Of  special  interest  are 
those  of  the  vegetable  proteins,  in  which  the  rotation  was  measured 
under  as  nearly  as  possible  identical  conditions.  Some  of  the  chief 
determinations  are  given  in  the  following  table : — 

Protein. 

Animal  proteins : — 

Egg-albumin 
Haemoglobin 
Globin 

Nucleo-proteins 
Crystallin  (o-variety) 

„         (j8-variety) 
Plant  proteins : — 

Edestin  (Hemp-seed) 
Globulin  (Flax-seed) 

„        (Squash-seed) 
Excelsin  (Brazil-nut) 
Amandin  (Almond) 
Corylin  (Filbert) 
Globulin  (English-walnut) 

„        (Black-walnut) 
Phaseolin  (Kidney-bean) 
Legumin  (Horse-bean) 
Zein  (Maize) 
Gliadin  (Wheat) 


SECTION  VIII. 


Rotation. 

MD- 3070 
We  +  io*4\ 
[«]c-54'2/ 
Dextrorotatory 
[o]D  -  46-9 
[ab-43'3 

MD 

-41-3 

-43-53 

-3873 

-  42-94 

-56-44 

-43-09 

-45-21 

-44-43 
-41-46 

-44-09 
-28-20 
-92-28 


Hopkins  and  Willcock. 
Gamgee  and  Croft  Hill. 
Gamgee  and  Jones. 


Osborne. 


-MOLECULAR  WEIGHT  DETERMINATIONS  BY 
CRYOSCOPIC  METHODS. 

(A)  Depression  of  Freezing  Point. 

Several  data  are  to  be  found  in  the  literature  referring  to  the 
depression  of  the  freezing  point  of  water  caused  by  the  solution  of 


THE  PHYSICAL  PROPERTIES  OF  THE  PROTEINS     25 


proteins.  The  determinations  were  made  with  a  view  to  the  estima- 
tion of  molecular  weights.  The  data  arrived  at  by  this  method  are, 
however,  of  little  value.  In  the  first  place  it  is,  as  has  been  re- 
peatedly stated,  extremely  difficult  to  free  proteins  from  the  last 
traces  of  inorganic  substances  ;  very  small  contaminations  of  such 
substances  with  low  molecular  weight  would  cause  relatively  very 
large  errors  in  the  determination  of  the  molecular  weight  of  such 
complex  substances  as  the  proteins.  In  the  second  place,  from  the 
direct  determinations  of  osmotic  pressures,  discussed  in  greater  detail 
below,  the  depression  in  the  freezing  point  of  a  salt-free  protein 
should  be  so  small  as  to  be  well  within  the  limits  of  experimental 
errors.  Moore  has  calculated  that  'OOi°  C.  should  correspond  to  an 
osmotic  pressure  of  9  mm.  of  mercury.  The  smallest  depression 
that  can  be  measured  by  a  Beckmann  thermometer  is  '005°  C., 
which  corresponds  to  an  osmotic  pressure  of  45  mm.  As,  in  prac- 
tice, pressures  of  this  order  have  to  be  measured  in  the  investigation 
of  proteins,  when  estimating  osmotic  pressures  directly,  it  is  obvious 
that  but  little  value  can  be  attached  to  determinations  of  freezing- 
point  depressions.  Nevertheless,  some  of  those  determinations 
made  with  peptones  and  other  degradation  products  are  of  interest, 
as  substances  of  much  lower  molecular  weight  than  the  proteins  from 
which  they  have  been  derived  are  here  being  dealt  with.  It  must  be 
remembered,  however,  that  these  peptones  are  not  pure  bodies.  A 
few  data  from  the  literature,  with  these  reservations,  are  given  below : — 


Substance. 
Egg-albumin 

Protalbumose 

Deutero-albumose 

Albumose 

Peptone  (commercial) 

Propeptone 

Antipropeptone  (albumose) 

Gelatin 

Peptone  (Merck) 

„       (Grubler) 
Glutin-peptone  hydrochloride 


Molecular 
Weight. 

14,270 

6400 

2467-2 

32CO 

2400 

1504-1754 

I20I-I2I5 

776-823 

878-960 

52Q-555 


278-704          Paal. 


Observer. 

Sabanejevv  and  Alexandrow. 
Bugarsky  and  Liebermann. 
Sabanejew. 

>• 

Bugarsky  and  Liebermann. 
Sabanejew. 
Paal. 


Ciamician  and  Zanetti. 
ii 


(B)    The  Direct  Determination  of  Osmotic  Pressure. 

Considerable  controversy  has  arisen  as  to  whether  colloids  exert 
any  osmotic  pressure  in  solution.  Several  investigations  on  this  sub- 
ject are,  however,  recorded  in  the  literature.  Starling,  in  the  course 
of  some  researches  on  the  function  of  the  glomeruli  of  the  kidney, 
measured  the  osmotic  pressure  exerted  by  a  serum  solution  of 
known  protein  content.  A  vessel  was  used  the  walls  of  which  were 
permeable  to  the  salts  but  not  to  the  proteins  contained  in  the 
serum  ;  for  this  purpose  they  were  constructed  of  peritoneal  mem- 
brane of  calf  previously  soaked  in  gelatin.  On  the  other  side  of 
the  membrane  was  placed  a  fluid  which  possessed  approximately 
the  same  salt  contents  as  the  serum ;  this  was  generally  prepared  by 
freeing  the  serum  experimented  with  from  its  protein  by  pressing  it 
through  gelatin  filters  under  a  pressure  of  30-40  atmospheres.  By 
having  on  one  side  of  the  membrane  natural  serum,  and  on  the 
other  serum  deprived  of  proteins  by  filtration,  and  by  connecting 
the  protein  containing  liquid  with  a  manometer,  the  osmotic  pressure 

3* 


26    THE  GENERAL  CHARACTERS  OF  THE  PROTEINS 

due  to  the  serum  protein  alone  could  be  directly  estimated,  and  the 
errors  due  to  the  presence  of  salts  thereby  eliminated. 

Moore  has  modified  this  method  for  estimating  the  osmotic  pres- 
sure of  colloids.  He  employs  a  special  form  of  osmometer,  consist- 
ing of  two  similar  platinised  capsules  each  of  about  20  c.c.  capacity, 
each  with  a  flange.  By  a  special  arrangement  of  rubber  bands  these 
capsules  can  be  screwed  together.  When  in  this  position  they  are 
separated  by  a  thick  platinum  grid  which  passes  between  the  flanges 
and  supports  a  parchment  membrane.  One  capsule  containing  the 
colloid  is  connected  with  the  manometer,  whilst  the  other  contains 
a  liquid  of  which  the  non-colloid  contents  are  approximately  iso- 
tonic  with  those  of  the  solution  containing  the  colloid.  In  this  way 
the  errors  due  to  the  presence  of  the  non-colloidal,  dialysable  sub- 
stances, etc.,  are  readily  eliminated. 

Various  estimations  of  osmotic  pressure  have  been  carried  out 
with  the  use  of  apparatus  of  this  character,  chiefly  by  Weymouth 
Reid,  who  used  the  Starling  form  of  osmometer,  and  by  Moore  and 
Parker,  and  Moore  and  Roaf. 

Reid  showed  that  proteins  that  have  been  well  washed  have 
practically  no  osmotic  pressure.  He  attributes  the  osmotic  pressure 
of  protein  solutions  recorded  by  other  observers  to  the  adsorbed 
inorganic  substances.  He  found,  however,  for  purified  dogs'  haemo- 
globin an  osmotic  pressure  varying  from  3'63-4'35  mm.  Hg  per 
I  per  cent,  concentration.  This  is  in  accord  with  an  observation  of 
Gamgee  (published  in  abstract,  Proc.  R.  S.,  1902,  70,  79)  that  haemo- 
globin possesses  conductivity  and  is  therefore  in  true  solution. 

Moore  and  his  co-workers  observed  quite  appreciable  pressure 
with  different  proteins,  which  varied  with  the  salt  contents  of  the 
solution.  Moore  maintains,  in  opposition  to  Reid,  that  the  proteins 
exert  a  definite  osmotic  pressure,  but  that  their  state  of  aggrega- 
tion varies  in  solutions  containing  different  quantities  of  salt ;  he 
conceives  that  by  repeated  reprecipitation,  washing,  etc.,  the  aggre- 
gates become  so  large  that  they  exert  no  osmotic  pressure. 

From  the  above  short  summary  it  is  obvious  that  cryoscopic 
methods,  at  any  rate  in  the  present  state  of  our  knowledge  of 
colloids,  can  bear  but  little  value  in  fixing  the  character  of  individual 
proteins. 


SECTION  IX.— THE  ELECTROLYTIC  CONDUCTIVITY  OF  PROTEIN 

SOLUTIONS. 

The  difficulty  of  obtaining  protein  solutions  free  from  electrolytes 
with  relatively  high  conductivity  must  be  taken  into  account  again 
when  measuring  the  electrolytic  conductivity  of  protein  solutions. 

The  method  has  been  employed  in  a  large  number  of  cases,  as  an 
adjunct  to  chemical  methods,  e.g.>  in  determining  the  capacity  of 
proteins  to  form  salts  with  acids  or  bases,  in  determining  the  disso- 
ciation constants  of  such  salts,  and  also  in  investigating  the  rate  of 
hydrolysis  of  proteins  by  acids  or  enzymes.  It  will  be  necessary  to 
refer  to  the  conductivity  of  protein  solutions  again  later  when  discuss- 
ing the  action  of  alkalies  and  bases  (p.  39). 


THE  PHYSICAL  PROPERTIES  OF  THE  PROTEINS     27 


SECTION  X. — THE  "  GOLD  NUMBER  ". 

Zsigmondy  has  shown  that  colloids  possess  the  property  of  in- 
hibiting the  transformation  of  bright  red  colloidal  gold  solutions  into 
the  non-colloidal  form,  a  change  which  can  be  brought  about  by  the 
addition  of  salts.  The  quantity  of  substance  necessary  to  inhibit  this 
transformation  varies  greatly  with  different  classes  of  colloids,  and  is 
characteristic  for  each  individual.  Zsigmondy  proposes,  therefore, 
to  regard  this  quantity  as  a  definite  factor  for  the  identification  of 
individual  colloids.  The  "gold  number"  he  defines  as  "  the  number 
of  milligrams  of  a  colloid  which  are  just  insufficient  to  prevent  10  c.c. 
of  a  bright  red  gold  solution,  prepared  under  certain  specified  condi- 
tions, from  changing  into  violet,  or  nuances  of  violet  immediately,  or 
shortly  after  the  addition  of  I  c.c.  of  a  10  per  cent,  salt  solution  ". 

He  divides  the  colloids  into  four  classes,  viz. : — 

Class  I.  Colloids  with  the  gold  number  0*005  to  0*1.  This 
includes  gelatin,  caseinogen,  isinglass,  animal  glue. 

Class  II.  Colloids  with  gold  number  0*1  to  10,  including  crystal- 
line egg-albumin,  gum-arabic,  tragacanth. 

Class  III.  Colloids  with  gold  number  10  to  500,  including  dextrin, 
potato  starch. 

Class  IV.  Colloids  which  are  inactive,  including  silicic  acid, 
soluble  glass  and  mucin. 

In  the  following  table  are  given  the  gold  numbers  of  certain 
characteristic  proteins  : — 


TABLE. 


Substance. 
Gelatin 
Russian  glue 
Isinglass 
Caseinogen 
Glycoprotein 
Deutero-albumose 
Egg-globulin 
Ovomucoid 

Crystallised  egg-albumin 
Amorphous 


Gold  Number. 


0-005-0-01 
0-01-0-02 

o-oi 
0*05-0-1 

00 

0-02-0*05 
0-04-0-08 

2-8 
0-03-0-06 


(After  separation  of  the  crystalline.) 
Merck's  albumin  0-1-0-3 

Fresh  egg-white  0-08-0-15 

It  is  of  interest  to  note  in  the  above  table  the  high  value  for 
crystallised  egg-albumin. 

Method. 

Preparation  of  the  Gold  Solution. — One  hundred  and  twenty  c.c. 
of  water  are  distilled  through  a  silver  condensing  tube  into  a  beaker 
of  Jena  glass  of  300-500  c.c.  capacity.  They  are  then  heated,  and 
during  the  warming  2-5  c.c.  of  a  0*6  per  cent,  solution  of  hydrogen 
gold  chloride  and  3-3*5  c.c.  of  a  solution  of  the  purest  potassium  car- 
bonate (O'i  8  normal)  are  added.  After  boiling,  and  whilst  the  mixture 
is  still  hot,  3-5  c.c.  of  a  dilute  solution  of  formaldehyde  (0*3  c.c. 
commercial  formalin  in  100  c.c.  H2O)  are  added.  Only  Jena  glass 
rods  should  be  used  for  stirring.  After  a  short  time  a  bright  red 


28     THE  GENERAL  CHARACTERS  OF  THE  PROTEINS 
| 

colour  is  developed.    A  solution  thus  prepared  can  be  kept  for  a  long 
time  without  changing. 

Determination  of  the  "  Gold  Number". — Small  quantities  of  the 
colloid  solution  under  investigation  are  introduced  into  a  series  of  50 
c.c.  beakers.  The  colloid  should  be  measured  out  from  a  0*2  c.c. 
pipette  graduated  in  thousandths  of  a  cubic  centimetre.  The  quan- 
tities generally  used  are  0*005,  O'OI,  0*02,  0*05,  up  to  0*5  c.c.  Larger 
quantities  of  solution  are  to  be  avoided.  Five  c.c.  of  the  gold  solution 
are  then  introduced  into  each  beaker,  and  the  mixture  is  then  rapidly 
stirred.  After  three  to  five  minutes  0*5  c.c.  of  sodium  chloride  solu- 
tion (100  grams  NaCl  to  900  c.c.  water)  is  introduced  into  each 
beaker.  By  this  method  a  higher  limit  can  be  observed  in  which 
no  change  takes  place,  and  a  lower  limit  in  which  the  red  solution 
is  converted  into  violet.  In  this  way  the  limits  are  determined.  The 
number  of  milligrams  of  colloid  in  each  of  these  limits,  multiplied 
by  2,  gives  the  interval  which  is  designated  the  "  gold  number  ".  This 
factor  is  the  one  generally  determined  (see  table  above). 

SECTION  XI. — THE  FRACTIONAL  FILTRATION  OF  PROTEINS. 

In  1896  C.  J.  Martin  described  a  gelatin  filter,  through  which, 
under  pressure  of  40-50  atmospheres,  water  and  simpler  substances, 
such  as  sugar  and  salts,  could  be  made  to  pass,  whereas  more  complex 
colloidal  bodies,  such  as  the  proteins,  were  held  back.  The  apparatus 
employed  consisted  essentially  of  a  Pasteur-Chamberland  filter  candle, 
which  acted  as  a  support  for  a  membrane  of  gelatin  or  silicic  acid. 
This  was  mounted  in  a  gun-metal  filter  case,  which  was  connected 
with  a  steel  gas  cylinder  containing  air  under  the  requisite  pressure. 
The  liquid  to  be  filtered  was  introduced  into  the  filter  case,  which 
was  then  connected  with  the  compressed  air  cylinder.  The  water  and 
simple  bodies  commenced  to  filter  through  as  soon  as  the  requisite 
plus-pressure  was  attained.  This  process  of  filtering  served  as  a 
means  of  concentrating  protein  solutions  and  at  the  same  time  freeing 
them  from  contamination  with  simpler  substances. 

It  has  since  been  employed  in  a  limited  number  of  cases  for 
obtaining  some  information  as  to  the  relative  sizes  of  molecular 
aggregates  in  protein  solutions.  Thus,  for  example,  W.  A.  Osborne 
has  shown  that  the  sodium  salt  of  caseinogen  will  pass  through  a 
Martin  filter,  whereas  the  salt  of  the  dibasic  calcium,  with  approxi- 
mately double  the  molecular  weight,  is  held  back.  Craw  has  also 
employed  this  filter  for  the  separation  of  toxins  and  antitoxins. 

The  principle  involved  in  the  Martin  filter  has  recently  been 
extended  by  Bechhold,  who  has  devised  a  method  of  fractional 
filtration.  Instead  of  employing  a  filter  candle  for  impregnation 
with  the  filtering  membrane  he  uses  filter  paper.  This  is  soaked  in 
the  impregnating  membrane  (either  acetic  acid  solution  of  collodium 
or  an  aqueous  solution  of  gelatin)  in  vacuo  in  a  specially  devised 
apparatus.  In  this  way  a  relatively  thin  filter  with  a  large  surface 
can  be  obtained.  This  is  introduced  into  a  suitably  constructed 
filter  funnel,  in  which  it  is  supported  on  a  nickel  gauze ;  the  funnel 
is  inserted  in  a  metallic  cylinder,  which  can  be  connected  either  with 
compressed  air  or  a  force  pump,  so  as  to  produce  a  plus-pressure  on 
one  side  of  the  filter  ;  a  stirrer  can  also,  if  necessary,  be  inserted  so 


THE  PHYSICAL  PROPERTIES  OF  THE  PROTEINS     29 


that  the  surface  of  the  filtering  liquid  in  contact  with  the  membrane 
can  be  continually  changed.  With  this  apparatus  comparatively 
small  plus-pressures  only  are  necessary  (from  i  to  5  atmospheres). 

By  employing  impregnating  membranes  of  different  concentra- 
tions Bechhold  has  succeeded  in  devising  a  method  of  differential 
filtration.  Thus,  for  example,  a  filter  paper  impregnated  with  3  per 
cent,  gelatin,  when  tested  with  a  I  per  cent  haemoglobin,  allowed 
appreciable  quantities  of  the  solute  to  pass ;  a  similar  filter  impreg- 
nated with  4  per  cent,  gelatin  was  not  permeable  to  haemoglobin. 

The  more  concentrated  the  impregnating  solution  the  higher  the 
plus-pressure  necessary  for  filtration. 

The  filters  made  from  more  concentrated  solutions  have  neces- 
sarily smaller  pores ;  such  filters  will  allow  the  passage  only  of 
substances  in  a  state  of  comparatively  simple  aggregation  ;  they  can 
in  this  way  be  separated  from  the  substances  in  which  the  state  of 
aggregation  is  more  complex.  An  interesting  example  of  the  method 
of  employment  of  the  filter  is  afforded  by  Bechhold  in  his  description 
of  the  attempt  to  separate  the  constituents  of  Witte's  peptone.  Pick 
(see  p.  14)  has  described  the  following  fractions  obtained  with  am- 
monium sulphate  :  Protalbumose  (24-42  per  cent,  saturation),  deutero- 
albumose  A  (54-62  per  cent),  deutero-albumose  B  (70-95  per  cent), 
deutero-albumose  C  (100  per  cent  +  acid).  A  clear  5  per  cent, 
solution  of  Witte's  peptone  solution,  which  gave  a  precipitate  on  23 
per  cent,  saturation,  was  submitted  to  filtration  under  I  atmosphere 
plus-pressure  through  a  3  per  cent  gelatin  filter  ;  a  similar  filter 
impregnated  with  2' 5  per  cent,  gelatin  was  just  not  permeable  to 
haemoglobin.1  The  residue  on  the  filter  was  twice  diluted  with  water 
and  twice  subjected  to  filtration  with  a  similar  filter.  Precipitation 
in  the  filtrate  commenced  only  when  the  saturation  with  ammonium 
sulphate  reached  34  per  cent.,  whereas  the  residue  on  the  filter  com- 
menced to  precipitate  when  the  liquid  was  only  23  per  cent  saturated  ; 
hence  a  separation  into  two  fractions,  viz.,  one  precipitable  at  34  per 
cent,  saturation  and  one  at  23  per  cent.  Other  experiments  of 
similar  nature  gave  analogous  results.  They  are  summarised  below : — 


Fraction  and  Precipitation  Limits, 

(NH4)2S04. 
Protalbumose  (24-42  per  cent.) 


B 


Filter  Used.  Result. 

3  per  cent.         Residue  commenced  to  precipitate  at 

34  per  cent,  saturation. 
Residue  precipitated  between  34  and 

4  „  95  per  cent,  saturation. 

Filtrate  precipitated  between  95  and 
,  loo  per  cent. 


Deutero-albumoses        A 

(54-95  per  cent.)  4 

Deutero-albumose  C  (100  per 

cent.  +  acid)  4 

Fractional  filtration  gives  results,  therefore,  which  are  analogous 
to  those  obtained  by  fractional  precipitation  with  salts  and  may  serve 
as  a  valuable  additional  adjunct  to  this  process.  Here,  again,  how- 
ever, complete  separations  are  not  to  be  expected ;  for  neither  the 
size  of  the  aggregates  in  the  solution  to  be  filtered,  nor  the  size  of  the 
filter  pores,  are  of  uniform  size,  as  Bechhold  has  experimentally 
demonstrated.  The  method  is  still  new,  and  promises  to  be  a 
valuable  addition  to  the  technique  for  dealing  with  proteins.  It 
might  prove  of  great  utility  in  conjunction  with  a  tedious  fractional 
precipitation  method,  such  as  that  employed  by  Haslam. 

1  One  per  cent,  hsemoglobin  was  used  as  a  test  solution  for  filter  membranes ;  the 
minimum  concentration  necessary  to  produce  a  filter  not  permeable  to  haemoglobin  in 
this  solution  was  determined.  To  express  this  the  formula  3  per  cent.  (H  2-5  per  cent.) 
is  employed. 


PART  II. 

THE  GENERAL  CHEMICAL  CHARACTERS  OF 
THE  PROTEINS. 

SECTION  XII.— THE  QUALITATIVE  REACTIONS  OF  THE 

PROTEINS. 

PROTEINS  may  be  precipitated  from  solutions  by  the  following  re- 
agents : — 

I.  By  various  mineral  acids.     Nitric  acid  is  very  often  employed. 
If  allowed  to  flow  into  a  protein  solution  a  white  ring  forms  at  the 
junction  of  the  acid  and  the  solution.     This  delicate  reaction   is 
generally  known  as  Hellers  test. 

Metaphosphoric  acid  is  a  precipitant  of  the  proteins,  but  not  the 
ortho-  or  pyro-acids. 

II.  Ferrocyanic   acid   is   a   good    precipitant.      A   mixture   of 
potassium  ferrocyanide  and  acetic  acid  is  generally  employed. 

III.  The  salts  of  the  heavy  metals  precipitate  proteins.     This 
reaction  will  be  discussed  in  greater  detail  later. 

IV.  The  ordinary  alkaloidal  reagents  precipitate  proteins,  e.g., 
phosphotungstic   acid,    phosphomolybdic  acid,   potassium  mercuric 
iodide,  potassium  bismuth  iodide,  tannic  acid,  picric  acid.      These 
reagents  should  be  added  to  the  slightly  acidified  solution. 

V.  Trichloracetic  and  sulphonylsalicylic  acids  are  good  precipi- 
tants. 

VI.  Also   uranyl   acetate.      The   precipitate  thus    produced    is 
soluble  in  acids. 

VII.  Nucleic  acid  and  protamines. 

The  following  are  the  chief  colour  reactions  for  proteins.  Not 
every  protein  gives  a  positive  result  when  treated  with  the  reagents, 
as  the  various  colours  are  due  to  certain  specific  groups  contained  in 
the  molecule,  which  are  not  common  to  all  proteins.  Nevertheless, 
every  protein  will  give  positive  reactions  in  a  large  number  of  the 
tests. 

I.  Biuret  Reaction. — The   protein   is  first  treated  with  sodium 
hydroxide  solution,  and  then  copper  sulphate  in  very  dilute  solution 
is  added  drop  by  drop ;  a  reddish  violet  to  violet-blue  colour  will  be 
produced.     This  is  due,  according  to  Schiff,  to  the  presence  of  the 
following  groups : — 

CO.NH2  /CO.NH2         CO-NH2  |  | 

NH/  CH2/  |  NH2_C-CO~NH-C- 

\CO.NH2  \CO.NH2         CO-NH2  | 

II.  The  Xanthoproteic  Reaction. — Proteins  give  on  boiling  with 
strong  nitric  acid   yellow  flakes  or   a  yellow  solution,   which,   on 

30 


GENERAL  CHEMICAL  CHARACTERS  OF  PROTEINS  31 

making  alkaline,  becomes  orange  yellow.     This  is  probably  due  to 
the  presence  of  a  radical  containing  the  benzene  ring. 

III.  Milloris  Reagent. — This  consists  of  a  solution  of  mercury  in 
nitric  acid,  which  contains  nitrous  acid.     This  reaction  is  due  to  the 
presence  of  a  tyrosine  group. 

IV.  Colour  Reactions    due  to  the  Presence  of  the    Tryptophane 
Group  : — 

(a)  The  chief  of  these  is  the  Hopkins  and  Cole  modification  of 

the  so-called  Adamkiewicz  reaction.  As  originally  pro- 
posed by  Adamkiewicz,  the  reaction  consisted  in  treating 
the  protein  solution  with  one  volume  of  concentrated  sul- 
phuric acid  and  two  volumes  of  glacial  acetic  acid  ;  a  reddish 
violet  colour  was  thereby  produced.  Hopkins  and  Cole 
have  shown  that  this  reaction  is  due  to  the  presence  in  the 
acetic  acid  of  glyoxylic  acid,  produced  by  the  oxidation  of 
the  former  body,  a  process  which  readily  takes  place  on  its 
exposure  to  sunlight.  They  now  use  a  solution  of  glyoxylic 
acid  itself,  which  is  produced  by  the  reducing  action  of 
sodium  amalgam  on  a  solution  of  oxalic  acid. 

(b)  ReichPs  Reaction. — On  mixing  a  protein  with  an  alcoholic 

solution  of  benzaldehyde  and  adding  dilute  sulphuric  acid 
(one  volume  of  acid  to  one  volume  of  water)  and  ferric 
sulphate  a  blue  coloration  is  produced. 

(c)  Rhode's  Reaction. — A  weak  solution  of  dimethylaminobenz- 

aldehyde  is  mixed  with  the  protein  solution,  and  concentrated 
sulphuric  acid  is  allowed  to  flow  into  the  mixture.  A  reddish 
violet  colour  is  thereby  produced  which  changes  to  dark  violet. 

(d)  Liebermanns    Reaction. — When    a    protein    is   boiled   with 

alcohol,  then  treated  with  ether,  and  then  heated  with  con- 
centrated hydrochloric  acid,  a  blue  solution  is  produced. 
This  is,  according  to  Cole,  due  to  glyoxylic  acid,  contained 
as  an  impurity  in  the  ether.  If  this  is  the  case,  the  Lieber- 
mann  reaction  is  identical  with  that  of  Hopkins  and  Cole. 

(e)  According  to  Cole,  proteins  on  treatment  with  furfurol  and 

hydrochloric  acid  yield  a  purple-red  colour,  which  is  also  due 
to  tryptophane.     Some  proteins  containing  a  carbohydrate 
group  will  yield  the  reaction  directly  (cf.  Molisch-Udransky 
reaction  below). 
This  series  of  reactions  is  only  given  by  those  proteins  which 

yield  tryptophane  on  hydrolysis.     Gelatin,  for  example,  does  not  give 

these  reactions. 

V.  Diazobenzene  sulphonic  acid  in  the  presence   of  potassium 
hydroxide  yields  an  orange  to  brownish  red  colour,  which  on  treat- 
ment with  zinc  dust  changes,  owing  to  reduction,  to  a  fuchsin  colour. 
The  same  reaction  is  given  with  tyrosine  and  histidine. 

VI.  Reactions  due  to  the  Presence  of  a   Carbohydrate  Group. — 
Certain  proteins,  which   contain   a  carbohydrate   grouping  (glyco- 
proteins,  and  possibly  certain  albumins,  such  as  egg-albumin  and 
serum-albumin  J),  yield  reactions  indicating  the  presence  of  sugars. 
The  chief  of  these  are  (a)  the  Molisch-Udransky  reaction,  and  (b) 
the  orcin  reaction. 

1  In  these  cases  it  is  not  definitely  proved  whether  the  carbohydrate  group  is 
actually  contained  in  the  protein  molecule,  or  whether  the  protein  is  contaminated  with 
a  sugar  or  glyco-protein. 


32     THE  GENERAL  CHARACTERS  OF  THE  PROTEINS 

(a)  The     Molisch-Udransky   Reaction. — Concentrated    sulphuric 
acid  is  added  to  a  solution  of  protein  containing  a  few  drops 
of  an  alcoholic  solution  of  a-naphthol.     A  violet  colour  is 
produced  which  turns  yellow  on  addition  of  alcohol,  ether 
or  sodium  hydroxide.     If  thymol  be  employed  instead  of 
a-naphthol  a  carmine-red  colour  is  produced. 

(b)  BiaPs  Modification  of  the  Orcin  Reaction. — A  small  quantity  of 

dried  protein  is  added  to  5  cc.  of  fuming  hydrochloric  acid,  and 
the  mixture  is  then  warmed.  When  the  protein  is  nearly 
all  dissolved  a  little  solid  orcin  is  added,  and  then  a  drop  of 
ferric  chloride  solution.  After  warming  for  some  time  a 
green  coloration  is  produced,  which  is  soluble  in  amyl  alcohol. 

VII.  Sulphur  Reaction. — On  warming  a  protein  solution  with- 
sodium  hydroxide  in  the  presence  of  a  lead  salt  (lead  acetate)  a 
black  coloration  is  produced  owing  to  the  presence  of  sulphur  in 
the  protein  molecule. 

As  already  mentioned,  the  above  tests  are  not  common  to  all 
the  proteins,  and  they  serve,  therefore,  for  qualitatively  distinguishing 
between  them  in  certain  cases.  Thus,  for  example,  hydroferrocyanic 
acid  gives  only  a  faint  precipitate  with  gelatin  ;  with  the  proteoses 
it  gives  a  precipitate  which  disappears  on  boiling  but  reappears  on 
cooling  the  solution  ;  with  peptones  it  gives  no  precipitate. 

Nitric  acid  also  gives  a  precipitate  with  the  proteoses,  which 
dissolves  on  boiling  and  reappears  on  cooling;  the  peptones  are  not 
precipitated. 

The  alkaloidal  reagents  precipitate  the  majority  of  the  proteins 
in  acid  solution  only ;  the  strongly  basic  protamines,  however,  can 
be  precipitated  in  alkaline  solution.  The  peptones  are  not  pre- 
cipitated by  picric  or  trichloracetic  acids,  or  by  potassio-mercuric 
iodide ;  they  are  precipitated,  however,  by  tannic,  phosphomolybdic 
and  phosphotungstic  acids.  The  colour  reactions,  as  already  men- 
tioned, are  due  to  certain  specific  groups,  which  are  not  common 
to  all  proteins.  All  give  the  biuret  reaction,  the  peptones  giving  a 
characteristic  pink  coloration. 

The  Millon  reaction,  which  is  due  to  the  presence  of  tyrosine,  is 
given  only  very  faintly  by  gelatin ;  the  reaction  in  this  case  may  be  due 
to  an  impurity,  but  according  to  Morner  the  reaction  occurs  normally 
if  too  much  reagent  be  not  present.  The  reaction  is  not  given  by 
reticulin,  nor  by  the  protamines,  with  the  exception  of  cyclopterine. 

The  Adamkiewicz  (Hopkins-Cole)  reaction  varies  also  in  in- 
tensity with  the  different  proteins.  It  is  not  given  at  all  by  gelatin, 
which  does  not  yield  tryptophane  as  a  product  of  hydrolysis. 

An  interesting  example  of  the  application  of  the  colour  reactions 
is  afforded  by  Pick,  who  found  considerable  differences  in  the  colour 
reactions  of  the  various  fractions  of  Witte's  peptone,  obtained  by  the 
method  which  has  been  already  discussed  (p.  14). 

SECTION  XIII.— THE  CHEMICAL  COMPOSITION  OF  PROTEINS. 
THE  NITROGEN  CONTENT  AND  DISTRIBUTION. 

Proteins  sometimes  occur  in  nature  combined  with  other  organic 
complexes,  which  have  been  designated  by  Hoppe-Seyler  as  "pros- 
thetic" groups,  from  which,  by  gentle  chemical  treatment  (e.g.,  by 


GENERAL  CHEMICAL  CHARACTERS  OF  PROTEINS  33 
v 

weak  acids  at  the  ordinary  temperature),  they  can  be  readily  freed. 
These  conjugated  proteins  give  the  same  general  chemical  reactions  as 
the  simple  proteins.  The  chief  groups  are :  (i)  the  nucleo-proteins,  or 
proteins  in  combination  with  a  nucleic  acid  complex ;  (2)  the  glyco- 
proteins,  or  proteins  in  combination  with  a  complex  which  can  exert 
a  reducing  action  on  alkaline  copper  solutions  [it  has  not  been 
definitely  proved  that  the  prosthetic  group  in  this  class  is  always  a 
carbohydrate];  (3)  the  chromo-proteins,  or  proteins  containing  a 
chromatogenic  group. 

It  is  not  proposed  to  consider  under  this  section  the  chemical 
composition  of  the  conjugated  proteins;  only  that  of  the  simple 
proteins,  either  those  existing  as  such  in  nature,  or  those  obtained  by 
the  decomposition  of  conjugated  proteins,  will  be  discussed. 

The  essential  constituents  of  a  protein  molecule  are  carbon, 
hydrogen,  nitrogen,  oxygen  and,  in  nearly  all  cases,  sulphur.  Some 
proteins  contain  in  addition"  "phosphorus,  and  the  halogens  are  also 
found  in  a  limited  number  of  substances  of  this  class. 

It  is  extremely  difficult  to  prepare  the  majority  of  proteins  free 
from  ash ;  in  some  cases  the  inorganic  constituents  may  be  in  com- 
bination with  the  organic  body  (the  question  of  salt  formation  will  be 
discussed  later)  and  in  others  simply  adsorbed. 

The  carbon,  hydrogen  and  nitrogen  content  of  a  protein  varies 
in  substances  of  very  different  origin  and  character  within  compara- 
tively very  narrow  limits ;  the  numbers  obtained  by  an  ordinary 
elementary  analysis  of  carbon,  hydrogen  and  nitrogen  cannot  be 
regarded  as  very  characteristic.  The  following  analyses  will  serve  as 
an  example : — 


Substance. 
Serum-albumin 
Albumin 
Edestin 


c 

Per  Cent. 

52-93 
52-75 
51-27 

5I-03 
52-75 
52-96 


Per  Cent. 

7-05 
7-12 
6-85 

6-74 
6-84 
7-05 


N 
Per  Cent. 


15-89 

15-43 
18-76 
18-19 
17-72 
15-65 


Observer. 
Abderhalden. 
Hopkins. 
Osborne. 


Hammarsten. 


Origin. 
Horse 

Egg 

Hemp-seed 

Rye 

Gliadin  „ 

Caseinogen  Cows'  milk 

Although  these  bodies  yield  very  different  amounts  of  the  typical 
hydrolysis  products,  and  are  undoubtedly  differently  constituted 
chemically,  their  contents  of  carbon  and  hydrogen  vary  within  com- 
paratively narrow  limits.  The  nitrogen  shows  larger  variations,  the 
plant  globulins  containing  generally  between  2  and  3  per  cent,  more 
than  the  typical  animal  proteins.  In  certain  other  cases  also  the 
nitrogen  content  is  high,  viz.,  in  the  proteins  of  more  basic  character 
like  the  histones  and  protamines,  substances  whicri  on  hydrolysis  yield 
relatively  large  quantities  of  diamino-acids.  The  thymus  histone 
contains,  for  example,  18-35  Per  cent,  nitrogen,  whilst  the  protamine 
salmine,  from  salmons'  testicles,  contains  no  less  than  31-69  per  cent. 
Taken  as  a  whole,  the  nitrogen  does  not  show,  however,  very  large 
variations  ;  in  fact,  the  nitrogen  content  of  a  mixture  is  often  taken 
as  the  index  of  the  amount  of  protein  present. 

The  Nitrogen  Distribution  in  Proteins. 

It  has  been  already  stated  that  the  proteins  are  essentially  poly- 
peptides  formed  by  the  condensation  of  varying  numbers  of  groups 
of  diamino-  and  monoamino-acids,  which  are  obtained  from  the 
proteins  by  hydrolysis.  In  addition  to  these  acids,  another  hydrolysis 


34     THE  GENERAL  CHARACTERS  OF  THE  PROTEINS 

i 

product  is  in  almost  all  instances  obtainable,  viz^  ammonia.  The 
relative  amount  of  these  bodies  forms  a  factor  which  is  characteristic 
of  each  individual  protein.  As  to  the  origin  of  the  ammonia  but 
little  is  known.  It  is  possibly  derivable  from  asparagine  or  some 
allied  amide  which  pre-exists  in  a  conjugated  form  in  the  protein 
molecule.  The  nitrogen  obtainable  in  the  form  of  ammonia  by  the 
hydrolysis  of  proteins  is  consequently  designated  "  amide-nitrogen  ". 
The  nitrogen  of  the  monoamino-acids  is  known  as  "  monoamino- 
nitrogen,"  that  from  the  diamino  acids,  which  can  be  distinguished 
from  the  monoamino-acids  by  the  fact  that  the  former  only  are 
precipitable  by  phosphotungstic  acid,  as  "diamino  or  basic  nitrogen". 
In  addition  to  the  nitrogen  in  the  above  forms  a  small  quantity  of 
pigmented  bodies  are  formed  during  hydrolysis  ;  the  nitrogen  con- 
tained in  these  bodies  is  generally  designated  as  "  humin  "  nitrogen. 

Systematic  experiments  on  the  determination  of  the  distribution 
of  nitrogen  amongst  the  various  forms  of  hydrolysis  products  were 
carried  out  by  Hausmann  in  Hofmeister's  laboratory,  and  the  per- 
centages in  the  various  forms  of  amide,  monoamino,  diamino  and 
humin  nitrogen  are  often  referred  to  as  the  "  Hausmann  numbers  ". 

In  the  method  originally  devised  by  Hausmann  the  following 
operations  were  carried  out :  (i)  the  hydrolysis  of  the  proteins  with 
hydrochloric  acid  ;  (ii)  the  determination  of  the  amide-nitrogen  by 
distillation  of  the  diluted  hydrolysis  products  with  magnesium  oxide, 
by  means  of  which  the  ammonium  salts  are  decomposed,  and  the 
estimation  of  the  ammonia  evolved  by  collecting  it  in  a  known 
amount  of  standard  acid ;  (iii)  the  precipitation,  after  distilling  off 
the  ammonia,  of  the  residual  liquid  with  phosphotungstic  acid,  where- 
by the  diamino-acids  are  precipitated,  and  the  determination  of  the 
nitrogen  in  this  precipitate ;  (iv)  the  estimation  of  the  nitrogen  in 
the  filtrate  from  the  phosphotungstic  acid  precipitate.  This  gives 
the  nitrogen  of  the  monoamino-acids  (also  estimated  by  the  subtrac- 
tion of  the  other  numbers  from  the  total). 

Several  objections  were  raised  to  the  method  of  Hausmann 
shortly  after  it  was  published,  notably  by  Henderson,  Kutscher,  and 
by  Schulze  and  Winterstein.  It  was  urged  against  it  by  Hender- 
son that  the  amounts  of  "  amide-nitrogen  "  varied  when  different 
strengths  of  acid  and  varying  times  of  hydrolysis  were  employed. 
Kutscher  objected  to  the  method  on  the  ground  that  the  diamino-acids 
were  not  entirely  insoluble  in  water  and  excess  of  phosphotungstic  acid. 
Schulze  and  Winterstein, furthermore,  claimed  that  certain  monoamino- 
acids  such  as  phenylalanine  were  precipitable  by  phosphotungstic 
acid.  Another  objection  raised  was  that  by  treatment  with  magnesia 
ammonia  was  evolved  from  substances  other  than  ammonium  salts. 

These  objections  have  been  subjected  to  a  critical  examination  by 
T.  B.  Osborne  and  Harris,  and  by  Gumbel.  The  former  investi- 
gators have  shown  that  identical  numbers  can  be  obtained  where 
the  conditions  of  experiment  vary  even  within  fairly  wide  limits, 
although  they  admit  with  Henderson  that  different  u  amide-nitrogen  " 
numbers,  for  example,  can  be  obtained  by  acids  of  different  concen- 
trations and  by  varying  periods  of  hydrolysis.  They  show,  how- 
ever, that  variations  in  conditions  necessary  to  produce  different 
results  must  be  large,  and  that,  provided  that  certain  readily  specified 
conditions  be  adhered  to,  valuable  comparative  results  can  be  ob- 


GENERAL  CHEMICAL  CHARACTERS  OF  PROTEINS  35 


tained,  and  it  is  now  generally  admitted  that,  when  the  conditions 
for  determination  suggested  by  Osborne  and  Harris  and  by  Giimbel 
are  adhered  to  the  "  Hausmann  numbers  "  form  most  valuable  factors 
for  the  characterisation  of  the  individual  proteins. 

In  the  following  table  are  given  some  of  the  chief  results  obtained 
by  Osborne  and  some  results  by  Kossel  and  Kutscher,  rearranged 
and  recalculated  by  J.  H.  Millar,  together  with  some  more  recent 
determinations  by  Giimbel.  The  numbers  for  the  proteoses  and 
peptones  are  obtained  from  the  reports  of  the  Guinness  Laboratory, 
vol.  i.,  pt.  ii.  (1906),  pp.  230,  235. 


Group. 

Protein. 

Source. 

'c 

0 

£° 

<u 

fc 

§  . 

is 

I* 

d 
§2 

1 

< 

< 

K 

Salmine 

Salmon-roe 

o 

87-8 

Protamine 

Clupeine 
Sturine 

Herring-roe 
Sturgeon-roe 

— 

o 
o 

83-5 
83-7 

Cyclopterine 

Sea-owl 

—  — 

0 

67-7 

Histones 

Histone 
t  > 

Thymus 
Cod-fish  roe 

— 

3-3 
7-46 

38-7 

35-o 

Leucosine 

Wheat 

16-93 

6-85 

69-87 

20-67 

2'54 

Albumins  and 

Conalbumin 

Egg-white 

i6'ii 

7-51 

65-11 

25-82 

1-69 

phosphopro- 

Vitellin 

Egg-yoik 

16-28 

7-67 

62-41 

28-56 

i-35 

teins 

Ovalbumin 

Egg-white 

15-51 

8-64 

68-13 

21*27 

1-87 

Caseinogen 

Milk 

15-62 

10-36 

66-00 

22-34 

i-34 

Legumelin 

Pea,  etc. 

16-09 

6-46 

68-n 

23-05 

2*36 

Globulin 

Wheat 

18-39 

7-72 

53-40 

37-10 

1-52 

Legumin 

Pea,  etc. 

17-97 

9-40 

60-76 

28-82 

0-94 

Globulins 

Edestin 

Hemp-seed 

18-64 

10-08 

57-83 

31-70 

0-64 

Conglutin 

Lupine 

18-05 

13-18 

57-28 

28-58 

0-88 

Amandin 

Almond 

19-00 

16-05 

60-79 

21-84 

0-89 

Glutenin 

Wheat 

17-49 

18-86 

68-32 

11-72 

i  -08 

Zein 

Maize 

16-13 

18-40 

77-56 

3*03 

0-99 

Alcohol-soluble 
proteins 

Ale.  sol.  protein 
Hordein 
Bynin 

Oat 
Barley 
Malt 

15-67 

17-21 

16-26 

22*46 

23-30 
23-49 

68-09 
69-96 
68-69 

7-84 
4-47 
4'6i 

1-50 
1-33 
3-I3 

Gliadin 

Wheat  and  rye 

17-66 

23-78 

70-27 

5'54 

0-79 

Gluco-proteid 

Cartilage 

Nasal   septum 

_ 

12-97 

72-27 

12*27 

3-27 

of  oifif 

x 

Sclero-protein 

Gelatin 

Commercial 



1-61 

62-56 

35-83 

Gluco-proteid 

Chondroitin  = 

Nasal   septum 

— 

35-27 

21-57 

32-78 

9'54 

sulphuric  acid 

of  pig 

Albumose 
Albumose 
Polypeptide 

Prot-albumose 
Hetero-albumose 
Glutokyrin 

Witte's  peptone 
Witte's  peptone 
Gelatin 

— 

7-14 
6-45 

O'O 

68-17 
57-4 
33"o 

25*42 

38-93 
66-0 

— 

Polypeptide 

Caseokyrin 

Milk 

— 

O'O 

12-0 

88-0 

— 

Plant-albumose 

Malt-albumose  I. 

( 

21-3 

62-0 

7-5 

9-2 

Plant-albumose 

Malt-albumose  II. 



12-4 

70-8 

II'O 

5-8 

Plant-albumose 

Malt-albumose  III. 

4  Malt 



8-0 

62-0 

24-0 

6-0 

Plant  peptose 

Malt-peptone  I. 

) 

— 

3'5 

64-3 

30-5 

1-64 

Malt-peptone  II. 

1 

-~ 

6-5 

48-8 

41-0 

3-65 

36    THE  GENERAL  CHARACTERS  OF  THE  PROTEINS 

Method. 

The  method  adopted  is  the  Osborne- Harris  modification  of  the 
original  Hausmann  method,  with  a  further  modification  suggested  by 
Giimbel,  viz.)  the  employment  of  a  vacuum  at  a  temperature  of  40°  C., 
for  the  distillation  of  the  ammonia  after  treatment  with  magnesia. 

About  i  gram  of  protein  is  boiled  with  20  per  cent,  hydro- 
chloric acid  until  the  solution  no  longer  gives  the  biuret  reaction, 
usually  from  seven  to  ten  hours.  It  is  then  evaporated  at  40°  under 
diminished  pressure  to  2-3  c.c.  and  the  bulk  of  the  hydrochloric  acid 
is  thereby  removed.  The  residual  solution  is  then  transferred  to  a 
flask  with  about  350  c.c.  of  water,  and  a  cream  of  magnesia,  which 
has  been  freed  from  every  trace  of  ammonia  by  prolonged  boiling 
is  then  added  until  in  slight,  but  distinct,  excess.  After  distilling 
and  determining  the  ammonia  by  warming  to  40°  in  vacua,  and 
passing  the  distillate  into  a  known  quantity  of  a  standard  acid  solu- 
tion, the  solution  in  the  flask  is  filtered  through  a  nitrogen-free  filter 
paper,  and  the  residue  thus  collected  washed  thoroughly  with  water 
and  the  nitrogen  determined  in  it  together  with  the  paper  by 
Kjehldahl's  method  ("humin"  nitrogen).  The  filtered  solution  is 
next  concentrated  to  100  c.c.,  cooled  to  20°  C.,  5  grams  of  sulphuric 
acid  added,  and  then  30  c.c.  of  a  solution  containing  20  grams  of  phos- 
photungstic  acid  and  5  grams  of  sulphuric  acid  per  100  c.c.  After 
twenty-four  hours  the  precipitate  is  filtered  off  and  washed  with  a  solu- 
tion containing  2*5  grams  of  phosphotungstic  acid  and  5  grams 
of  sulphuric  acid  per  100  c.c.  The  washing  is  effected  by  rinsing  the 
precipitate  from  the  filter  into  a  beaker  and  returning  to  the  paper 
three  successive  times,  each  portion  of  the  wash  solution  being  allowed 
to  run  out  completely  before  the  next  is  applied.  About  200  c.c.  of 
washings  are  thus  obtained.  The  nitrogen  contained  in  the  precipi- 
tate ("  basic  "  nitrogen)  is  then  determined  by  transferring  it  to  a 
Jena  glass  flask  of  about  600  c.c.  capacity  and  digesting  with  35  c.c. 
concentrated  sulphuric  acid  for  seven  or  eight  hours.  During  diges- 
tion potassium  permanganate  crystals  are  added  three  or  four  times. 
In  a  few  cases,  when  the  phosphotungstic  acid  precipitate  is  small, 
less  sulphuric  acid  is  used,  enough  being  taken  in  each  case  to 
prevent  too  violent  bumping.  The  remaining  nitrogen,  belonging 
chiefly  to  monoamino  acids,  is  found  by  subtracting  the  sum  of  the 
nitrogen  found  in  the  preceding  operations  from  the  total  nitrogen 
contained  in  the  protein  under  examination. 

Skraup  has  recently  shown  that  two  -  thirds  of  the  amide- 
nitrogen  is  evolved  in  a  very  short  time,  even  with  the  use  of 
dilute  acids  for  hydrolysis. 


SECTION  XIV.— THE  SULPHUR,  PHOSPHORUS  AND  HALOGEN 
CONTENT  OF  PROTEINS. 

The  Sulphur  Content. 

Far  more  characteristic  of  the  individual  protein  than  the  per- 
centage of  nitrogen  is  that  of  the  sulphur.  Although  the  latter  element 
is  not  contained  in  large  quantity,  yet  the  variations  in  its  amount 
are  considerable,  and  its  percentage  may  be  regarded  as  one  of  the 


GENERAL  CHEMICAL  CHARACTERS  OF  PROTEINS  37 


characteristic  constants  of  a  protein;   it  indicates  the  quantity  of 
the  cystine  unit  present  in  the  molecule. 

In  the  following  table  the  percentage  of  sulphur  present  in  some 
typical  proteins  is  given : — 

Sulnhur 

Observer. 

Goto  (i). 
Fleroff  (2). 
Bang  (3). 
Schulz  (4). 
Michel  (5). 

Osborne  and  Campbell  (6). 
Osborne  and  Voorhees  (7). 
Hammarsten  (8). 
Osborne  (9). 

Osborne  and  Voorhees  (10). 
Osborne  and  Campbell  (n). 
(12). 

Chittenden  &  Osborne  (13). 
Osborne  and  Voorhees  (14). 

(15). 
Hammarsten  (16). 

(i7). 

Walter  (18). 
Levene  (19). 
Chittenden  and  Solley  (20). 

Von  Laar  (21). 

Horbaczewski  (22). 
Mulder  (23). 
Schwarz  (24). 
Siegfried  (25). 
of  pig's  intestine 
Aorta,  Liver,  2-65-2-89  Lubarch  (26). 

Spleen,  etc. 
Witte's  peptone        1*22         Pick  (27). 

2-97 

0-8 

ri-i-6 


Substance. 

Sulphur 
Origin.                 Per 

r 

Jent. 

Clupeine 

Herring  testicles 

o 

Histone 

Thymus 

0-62 

Scomber  histone 

Mackerel  testicles 

0-79 

,Globin 

Haemoglobin 

0-42 

Albumins 

J  Albumin 

Serum 
Egg 

1-90 

1-62 

I  Leucosin 

Wheat 

1-28 

/-Globulin 

Blood 

I'll 

Edestin 

Hemp-seed 

0-91 

Globulins  -I  Globulin 

Wheat 

0-69 

I  Conglutin 

Lupine  seeds 

0-40 

^Globulin 

Egg 

0-123 

Alcohol- 

(Zein 

Maize 

o'6o 

soluble 

Gliadin 

Wheat  kernel 

1-14 

proteins 

Glutenin 

11 

i  -08 

Caseinogen 

Milk 

0-76 

Fibrinogen 
Ichthulin 
it 

Blood 
Carp's  egg 
Cod's  egg 

1-25 
0-41 
0-92 

Commercial 

0-7 

gelatin 

Hair 

Human 

5  'oo 

Nail 

» 

2-80 

Horn 

(average) 

3'2Q 

Tortoise-shell 

2'22 

Elastin 

0-38 

Reticulin 

Mucous  membrane 

1-88 

Amyloid 

Hetero-prot.- 

albumose 
Deutero-albu- 

mose  (Thio) 
Deutero-albu- 

mose  (S.  poor) 
Other  albumoses 


Phosphorus  Content. 

Certain  proteins,  the  phosphoproteins,  are  characterised  by  the 
relatively  large  amount  of  phosphorus  they  contain.  They  must  be 
distinguished  from  the  nucleo-proteins,  in  which  the  phosphorus  is 
contained  in  the  prosthetic  group,  nucleic  acid,  and  not  in  the  protein 
part  of  the  molecule.  The  typical  phosphoprotein  caseinogen  con- 
tains, according  to  Hammarsten,  0*847  per  cent,  of  phosphorus; 
ovovitellin  contains,  according  to  Plimmer,  i'i  per  cent.;  ichthulin 
from  carps'  eggs  contains  0*43  per  cent.  (Walter,  loc.  cit.^  in  the 
table),  and  the  corresponding  substance  from  cods'  eggs  0*92  per 
cent  (Levene).  Plimmer  and  Scott  have  recently  shown  that  the 
phosphoproteins  are  easily  decomposed  by  I  per  cent,  caustic  soda,  and 
are  thus  readily  distinguished  from  the  nucleo-proteins.  Ordinary 
proteins  contain  very  small  quantities,  if  indeed,  any  phosphorus. 

Halogen    Content. 

Certain  proteins  contain  very  appreciable  quantities  of  halogen. 
The  chief  of  these  is  the  thyro-globulin  of  the  thyroid  gland,  in  which 


38     THE  GENERAL  CHARACTERS  OF  THE  PROTEINS 

iodine  was  first  detected  by  Baumann  in  1895.  The  iodine  containing 
protein  has  been  exhaustively  studied  by  Oswald.  The  amount  of 
iodine  varies  in  different  preparations  ;  Oswald  found  0*46  per  cent, 
in  the  thyro-globulin  prepared  from  pigs'  thyroids,  O'86  from  ox  thy- 
roid, and  0-39  from  sheep's  thyroid  ;  in  human  thyroid  he  found  from 
0*07  to  0*51  per  cent,  (the  latter  after  potassium  iodide  administration). 

Halogens  have  also  been  found  in  certain  marine  animals,  es- 
pecially in  the  skeletons.  The  axial  system  of  Gorgonia  cavolini 
contains,  according  to  Drechsel,  about  8  per  cent,  iodine  (calculated 
on  the  amount  of  dry  substance),  which  is  combined  with  the  protein 
substance  known  as  gorgonin.  Sponges  also  contain  iodised  pro- 
teins according  to  Hundeshagen  and  Harnack.  The  latter  by  the 
hydrolysis  of  sponges  with  mineral  acids  isolated  the  protein  body 
iodospongin  containing  9  per  cent  of  iodine. 

Various  other  proteins  with  halogen  content  have  been  recently 
isolated  from  marine  organisms  by  Morner. 

SECTION  XV.— THE  TYROSINE  FACTOR  OF  PROTEINS. 

Each  individual  protein  yields  on  hydrolysis  certain  definite  quan- 
tities of  amino  acids.  The  method  of  determining  these  quantities 
with  any  degree  of  accuracy  is  unknown  for  the  majority  of  the 
amino  acids ;  even  by  the  esterification  method  of  Emil  Fischer  only 
approximate  results  are  obtained. 

There  are,  however,  at  least  one  or  two  hydrolysis  products,  of 
which  the  yield  can  be  readily  determined  when  only  small  quantities 
of  the  protein  from  which  they  are  derived  is  available.  The  quan- 
tity of  the  cystine  group  can  be  estimated  by  a  determination  of  the 
total  sulphur  of  the  molecule  1  (see  p.  30).  Another  hydrolysis  pro- 
duct, the  amount  of  which  can  be  readily  determined,  is  tyrosine  ; 
it  is  probable  that  the  tyrosine  factor  (i.e.t  the  percentage  of  tyrosine 
liberated  on  hydrolysis)  will  form  a  definite  characteristic  for  each 
protein. 

There  are  several  earlier  investigations  on  this  subject,  which  are 
summarised  in  a  paper  by  Reach.  In  the  researches  described  in 
this  and  the  previous  papers  the  tyrosine  was  obtained  in  the  form 
of  crystals,  which  were  weighed.  A  more  accurate  method  is,  how- 
ever, due  to  J.  H.  Millar,  who  has  shown  that  tyrosine  can  be  readily 
estimated  in  even  complex  mixtures  by  titrating  a  solution  of  a 
protein  containing  hydrochloric  acid  and  potassium  bromide  with 
a  standard  solution  of  potassium  bromate,  until  a  potassium  iodide- 
starch  indicator  denotes  the  presence  of  free  bromine.  The  reaction 
which  takes  place  may  be  represented  by  the  following  equations  : — 


NaBrO3  +  sKBr  +  6HC1  =  NaCl  +  sKCl  +  3Br2  +  3H2O. 
C6H4 .  (OH).  CH2 .  CH(NH2) .  COOH  +  4Br  =  C6H2Br2 .  (OH) .  CH2 .  CH  .  (NH2) .  COOH. 

According  to   the   theory  of  these  equations  1765  grams   of  bro- 
mine would  be  required  for  each  gram  of  tyrosine,  or  about  18*8  c.c. 

—  potassium  bromate  solution.    This  method  has  not  yet  been  much 

applied  to  the  investigations  of  the  hydrolysis  products  of  proteins. 
Adrian  Brown   and    E.    T.   Millar  have,  however,   recently  shown 

1  On  the  assumption  that  cystine  is  the  only  sulphur-containing  group. 


GENERAL  CHEMICAL  CHARACTERS  OF  PROTEINS  39 

that  in  the  proteins  they  investigated  (edestin  and  egg-albumin) 
scission  of  tyrosine  by  tryptic  digestion  is  a  very  rapid  process 
(whereas  there  is  no  scission  by  peptic  digestion) ;  the  whole  of  the 
tyrosine  from  edestin  and  egg-proteins  was  liberated  in  from  one  to 
three  hours.  It  is  conceivable  that  the  determination  of  tyrosine  in 
a  protein  by  this  method,  after  a  short  tryptic  digestion,  may  afford 
another  valuable  factor  for  the  characterisation  of  proteins. 

SECTION  XVL— SALT  FORMATION  BY  PROTEINS.    COMBINA- 
TION WITH  ACIDS  AND  BASES. 

One  class  of  the  proteins,  vis.,  the  protamines,  react  as  strong 
bases,  giving  alkaline  solutions  and  characteristic  salts  with  acids ; 
others,  of  which  caseinogen  may  be  taken  as  an  example,  react  as 
acids,  giving  salts  on  treatment  with  bases.  The  majority  of  the 
proteins,  however,  possess  an  amphoteric  reaction,  acting  as  bases 
towards  acids  and  as  acids  towards  bases. 

For  reasons  already  mentioned  in  the  introduction,  the  deter- 
mination of  the  acidity  or  basicity  of  proteins  offers  several  diffi- 
culties. The  chief  of  these  is  due  to  their  high  molecular  weight ; 
relatively  large  amounts  of  protein  will  require  for  neutralisation  but 
small  amounts  of  acids  and  bases.  Furthermore,  as  the  proteins  in 
several  instances  act  only  as  very  weak  acids  or  bases,  the  salts 
readily  undergo  hydrolysis  in  aqueous  solutions ;  the  ordinary  methods 
of  titration,  with  the  use  of  indicators,  are  not  therefore  available  for 
determining  their  combining  weights  with  acids  and  bases.  Con- 
sequently it  is  necessary  to  employ  indirect  methods,  of  which  the 
following  are  the  chief: — 

A.  Physical  Methods. 

I.  The  measurement  of  electrolytic  conductivity  when  acids  or 
bases  are  added  to  protein  solutions. 

II.  The  measurement  of  the  potential  of  concentration  cells,  and 
the  changes  produced  when  proteins  are  added  to  either  electrode. 

III.  The  determination  of  the  influence  of  the  addition  of  pro- 
teins on  the  depression  of  the  freezing  points  of  solutions  of  acids 
and  bases. 

IV.  The  determination  of  the  influence  of  the  addition  of  proteins 
on  the  rate  of  hydrolysis  of  cane-sugar  and  esters  by  acids   and 
bases. 

B.  Chemical  Methods. 

I.  Direct  titration  in  presence  of  indicators. 

II.  Determination  of  the  solubility  in  acids  and  bases  of  proteins 
which  are  insoluble  in  pure  water. 

III.  Determination  of  the  acidity  of  the  filtrate  from  protein 
precipitates   produced   by  neutral   salts   or   alkaloidal   reagents   in 
solutions  containing  an  excess  of  acids. 

It  is  proposed  to  consider  these  general  methods  first,  and  after- 
wards to  refer  to  some  of  the  more  recent  investigations  on  the  salt 
formation  of  individual  proteins. 

4 


40     THE  GENERAL  CHARACTERS  OF  THE  PROTEINS 

• 

A.  Conductivity  Method. 

This  method  was  first  applied  by  Sjoqvist. 

If  a  strong  base  be  gradually  added  to  a  solution  of  a  strong  acid, 
the  volume  of  the  solution  being  kept  constant,  and  the  electrolytic 
conductivity  be  determined  after  each  addition,  it  will  be  found  that 
it  gradually  diminishes,  until  a  certain  minimum  is  reached,  after 
which  it  gradually  increases.  This  minimum  represents  the  point 
at  which  the  acid  is  completely  neutralised  by  the  base.  When 
potassium  hydroxide  is  added  to  hydrochloric  acid  the  conductivity 
curve,  where  the  ordinates  represent  the  molecular  conductivity,  and 
the  abscissae  the  amount  of  alkali,  is  represented  by  a  descending 
and  an  ascending  straight  line  enclosing  a  sharp  angle.  The  attain- 
ment of  the  minimum  point  is  due  to  the  fact  that  both  the  acid  and 
the  base  are  better  conductors  than  the  salt  which  is  formed  by  their 
neutralisation  of  one  another.  If,  instead  of  a  strong  base,  a  weak 
base  like  ammonia  be  employed,  which  is  a  bad  conductor,  the  con- 
ductivity rises  but  slightly  after  the  neutralisation  point  is  reached  ; 
at  this  point  the  curve  becomes  nearly  parallel  with  the  abscissa.  A 
somewhat  similar  curve  is  obtained  when  egg-white  is  gradually 
added  to  a  solution  of  acids,  and  by  a  study  of  such  curves  Sjoqvist 
has  endeavoured  to  throw  some  light  on  the  salt  formation  of  the 
egg-proteins  with  acids. 

Two  additional  factors  have  in  this  case  to  be  taken  into  account, 
viz.  :  (a)  the  conductivity  due  to  the  protein  addition ;  (b)  the  decrease 
of  conductivity  due  to  the  lessened  velocity  of  the  ions  owing  to  the 
increased  internal  resistance  of  the  fluid  produced  by  the  addition  of 
the  proteins. 

The  conductivity  of  the  protein  alone  is  readily  determined. 
This  is  probably  due  entirely  to  combined  or  adsorbed  salts.  Al- 
though the  protein  solutions  used  in  Sjoqvist's  experiments  were 
carefully  dialysed,  they  could  not  be  obtained  ash  free.  The  ash 
was  found  to  consist  of  a  mixture  of  calcium  sulphate  and  phosphate. 

The  internal  friction  factor  is  not  so  readily  determined.  The 
alteration  of  the  conductivity  of  the  acid  due  to  this  factor  can  only 
be  determined  indirectly,  viz.,  by  determining  the  decrease  of  conduc- 
tivity of  a  neutral  salt  solution  produced  by  repeated  additions  of 
known  quantities  of  protein,  and  the  ratio  of  this  decrease  to  the 
decrease  produced  in  acids  by  other  non-electrolytes  which  increase 
internal  resistance,  and  upon  which  acids  do  not  chemically  act.  It  was 
found,  for  example,  in  the  experiments  of  Sjoqvist,  that  each  gram 
of  protein  added  to  a  0*05  N  sodium  chloride  solution  produced  (after 
allowance  for  the  conductivity  of  the  protein  alone)  a  diminution  of 
1*52  per  cent,  of  the  total  molecular  conductivity.  Now  the  mean  de- 
crease produced  by  six  other  non-electrolytes,  which  increase  internal 
friction,  was  found  by  Arrhenius  to  be  as  follows:  for  NaCl,  2*21 
per  cent.  ;  for  HC1,  1-84  per  cent.;  for  HNO3,  r88  percent.  If, 
now,  the  ratio  of  decrease  produced  by  proteins  is  the  same  as  for 
other  non-electrolytes,  then  the  diminution  of  conductivity  produced 
by  the  addition  of  each  gram  of  protein  to  100  c.c.  of  a  0*05  N 

hydrochloric  acid  solution  is  1*52  x  — 4  =  1*26  per  cent.     The  actual 

2'2I 

diminution  produced  when  egg-white  solution  is  added  to  0*05  N 


GENERAL  CHEMICAL  CHARACTERS  OF  PROTEINS  4! 

hydrochloric  acid  was  much  greater  than  this  :  the  diminution  was 
due  to  actual  neutralisation,  and  not  to  mere  increase  in  internal 
friction. 

Sjoqvist  determined  the  conductivity  of  the  0-05  N  hydrochloric 
acid  solution  after  the  addition  of  varying  amounts  of  egg-proteins, 
with  the  following  results  : — 

Amount  of  protein  in  100  c.c.  o  0-72  1*08  2-16  3-03       4-09    4-70 

£^pr           ....  334'5  286-2  263-1  196-2  140-3       97-5     78-52 

Amount  of  protein  in  100  c.c.  5*22  6-26  6-71  7-83  9-40 

^T            ....  68-66  60-7  59-43  58-32  57-7 

It  is  evident  from  the  above  numbers  that  in  the  last  determina- 
tions far  more  protein  was  added  than  was  necessary  to  neutralise 
the  hydrochloric  acid.  After  making  corrections  for  the  increased 
conductivity,  due  to  the  protein  added,  and  the  diminished  con- 
ductivity due  to  friction,  Sjoqvist  calculated  that  the  molecular  con- 
ductivity of  the  hydrochloride  of  the  egg-proteins  in  0*05  N  solution 
was  53  x  io~7,  and,  by  interpolation  in  the  curve,  that  neutralisation 
of  0*05  N  hydrochloric  acid  solution  was  attained  when  4*1  grams 
of  protein  had  been  added  to  100  c.c.  From  this  the  equivalent  of 
egg-protein  was  calculated  to  be  820.  This  number  obtained  with 
sulphuric  acid  was  found  to  be  840,  and  with  nitric  acid  720.  The 
average  is  not  far  removed  from  800. 

There  is  one  other  factor  in  these  experiments  which  deserves 
mention.  It  was  noticed  that  in  the  case  of  the  neutralisation  of 
hydrochloric  acid  by  ammonia  the  curve  first  descends,  and  then 
suddenly  becomes  almost  parallel  with  the  abscissa,  forming  thus 
two  straight  lines  enclosing  a  sharp  angle.  In  the  case  of  the  protein 
hydrochloric  acid  neutralisation  curve  there  is  no  sharp  break,  but 
the  curve  is  rounded  off.  This  is  due  to  the  fact  that  hydrolysis 
of  the  protein  hydrochloride  can  take  place  according  to  the  equation 

Alb.  HCl  +  H2O  =  Alb.  OH  +  HCl. 

This  hydrolysis  is  suppressed  in  the  presence  of  a  large  excess  of 
protein  (i.e.,  in  the  calculations  of  conductivity  given  above). 

The  amount  of  hydrolysis  has  been  determined  by  Sjoqvist  in 
the  following  way.  He  calculated  the  molecular  conductivity  of  a 
solution  produced  by  adding  the  inorganic  constituents  of  4  grams 
of  protein  to  100  c.c.  of  0*05  N  hydrochloric  acid  (the  quantity  neces- 
sary for  "  neutralisation,"  vide  supra).  Such  a  solution  would  con- 
tain known  quantities  (which  were  determined  by  analysis)  of  free 
HCl,  CaCl2,  H3PO4  and  H2SO4  (produced  by  the  action  of  a  large 
excess  of  HCl  on  the  original  salts  CaSO4  and  Ca3(PO4)2).  For  such 
a  solution  //,  was  found  to  be  3 14  x  10  ~  7.  The  conductivity  was  next 
calculated  for  this  solution  when  the  free  acids  were  neutralised  by 
egg-proteins  without  hydrolysis,  and  after  making  correction  for 
decreased  conductivity  due  to  viscosity.  (The  molecular  conduc- 
tivity of  egg-protein  hydrochloride  was  found  as  shown  above  to  be 
S3  x  10  ~  7,  and  that  of  the  sulphate  and  phosphate  were  determined 
in  a  similar  way  in  other  experiments.)  //,  for  this  neutralised  solu- 
tion was  calculated  to  be  55*66  x  10  "  7.  The  actual  observed  value 
was  100*5.  Now  as  314  x  io~7  represents  the  value  for  total 


42    THE  GENERAL  CHARACTERS  OF  THE  PROTEINS 

hydrolysis  of  the  hydrochloride  (the  protein  having  no  conductivity), 
and  5  5 '66  x  10  ~  7  represents  the  value  when  no  dissociation  takes 
place,  then  using  the  ordinary  formula  when  x  represents  the  pro- 
portion hydrolysed — 

314*  +  (i  -  *)55'66  =  100-5 

whence  x  =  0*174,  from  which  it  was  calculated  that  17*4  per  cent, 
of  protein  hydrochloride  was  hydrolysed  when  a  0*05  N  solution  of 
hydrochloric  acid  solution  was  neutralised  with  egg-proteins. 

These  experiments  of  Sjoqvist  were  carried  out  with  the  whole 
of  the  proteins  of  egg-white,  and  therefore  probably  with  a  mixture. 
Some  of  the  calculations,  furthermore,  are  approximations.  They 
have,  however,  been  described  in  some  detail,  as  they  demonstrate  in 
a  clear  manner  the  salt  formation  when  proteins  are  treated  with 
acids;  they  also  indicate  the  methods  for  determination  of  the 
hydrolysis  of  such  salts. 

A  similar  set  of  conductivity  determinations  with  the  proteins  of 
horse  serum  is  due  to  Mellanby. 

A.   II.  Electric  Potential  Method. 

This  method  has  been  employed  by  Bugarsky  and  Liebermann. 
According  to  the  theory  of  Nernst,  the  electro-motive  force  of  a 
galvanic  element  constituted  according  to  the  following  scheme — 

Platinum  laden  with  H2  |  Acid  |  Base  |  Platinum  laden  with  H2 

depends  on  the  concentration  of  the  hydrogen  ions  in  the  acid  and 
base  solutions. 

The  addition  of  a  protein  to  either  the  acid  or  base  would  in 
the  event  of  combination  and  salt  formation  alter  the  concentration  of 
the  various  ions  in  solution. 

The  electro-motive  force  of  such  an  element  as  the  above  can, 
according  to  the  Nernst  theory  of  electrolytic  solution  pressure,  be 
expressed  by  the  following  equation  : — 

RT  CH  d\ 

ir  =  p-  nat  log   — 
fc0  *H 

where  R  is  the  ordinary  gas  constant,  T  the  absolute  temperature, 
E  the  quantity  of  electricity  transported  by  I  gram  equivalent  of 
an  electrolyte,  CH  the  concentration  of  the  hydrogen  ions  in  the  acid, 
and  ^H  the  concentration  of  hydrogen  ions  in  the  base.  If  the  electro- 
motive power  be  expressed  in  volts,  the  quantity  of  electricity  in  cou- 
lombs, and  the  electrical  energy  I  volt-coulomb  =  10,000,000  ergs,  and 
the  experiments  be  all  carried  out  at  a  constant  temperature  (25°  C.), 

•p  "T1 

then  -=-   is  a  constant  =  0*0256. 

EO 

If  now  the  Brigg  logarithms  be  substituted  for  the  natural  loga- 
rithms, 

CH 
T  =  0-0590  Iog10  — -. 

H 

The  hydrogen  ions  in  the  acid  depend  on  the  dissociation  of  the 
acid  in  the  concentration  employed  in  the  experiments. 

In  the  base  solution  (sodium  hydroxide  was  used  in  the  experi- 


GENERAL  CHEMICAL  CHARACTERS  OF  PROTEINS  43 

ments),  if  CH  represent  the  concentration  of  the  hydrogen  ions,  and 
COH  that  of  the  hydroxyl  ions,  then  according  to  the  law  of  mass 
action, 

CH  .  COH  =  constant  =  K. 

In  the  presence  of  sodium  hydroxide  the  concentration  in  the 

hydroxyl  ions  is  decreased  (owing  to  dissociation  into  Na  and  OH). 
If  now  xH  represent  (as  above)  the  concentration  of  the  hydrogen 
ions,  and  COH  the  concentration  of  the  hydroxyl  ions  due  to  the 
presence  of  the  alkali,  then  (dissociation  of  water  being  negligible) 

*H  '  COM  =  K  a°d  #tr  =  n 

COH 

Substituting  this  value  in  equation  (i),  it  is  found  that 

c     c 

1T  =  0-059  10g10        H    K  °H- 

Suppose  now  that  the  ionic  concentration  of  the  acid  be  altered  by 
the  addition  of  protein  which  forms  a  salt  with  the  acid,  a  change  in 
the  electro-motive  force  will  follow.  The  concentration  of  the  hydro- 
gen ions  in  the  sodium  hydroxide  (CNaon)  will  remain  unchanged. 
If  CHCI  represent  the  ionic  concentration  of  the  original  acid  solution 
and  CH  that  after  addition  of  protein,  and  EQ  the  original  electro- 
motive force  and  E  the  changed  force,  then 

EQ    =    O-OSg   l°g 

and  E  =  0-059  loglv,  K 

Whence, 

^'HCK 

E  -  EQ    =    O-O59    lOg 


and  similarly  for  alkalis,  E  -  E0  =  O'O$g  log 

The  experiments  were  carried  out  with  O'OS  N  acid  and  alkali 
solutions  with  a  0*05  N  sodium  chloride  solution  interposed.  The 
electro-motive  force  was  determined  by  a  compensation  method, 
a  Clark  cell  being  used  as  standard.  Values  for  E  -  E0  and 

1  This  equation  is  not  strictly  correct,  for  between  the  sodium  hydroxide  and  acid 
solutions  there  is  a  layer  of  sodium  chloride,  and  there  are  consequently  potential 
differences  between  the  acid  |  salt  and  alkali  |  salt  solutions.  If  </>  represent  the  former 
of  these  differences,  and  ty  the  latter,  then  the  equations  become 

E0=  0-059  log10 

and  E  =  0-059  log,.  „. 

^  remaining  the  same  in  both  equations  and  the  ionic  concentration  in  the  alkali  not 
altering.     Then 

E  -  EQ  =  0-059  Iog10 


$  -  ^o  is  sma11  compared  with  the  other  number  and  was  neglected  in  calculating  the 

CHCI 
value 


44    THE  GENERAI^  CHARACTERS  OF  THE  PROTEINS 

Iog10      cl  were  plotted  as  ordinates  and  abscissae,  and  a  curve  drawn. 
CH 

By  means  of  this  curve  the  value  -~£l  could  be  ascertained  by  each 


experimentally  determined  value  E  -  Eo. 

The  following  were  some  of  the  results  obtained  : 


Egg  Protein  +  0-05  HC1. 

Egg-Protein  -f-  0-05  NaOH. 

Protein,  Grams  per 
100  c.c.  boluiion. 

Per  Cent.  HC1 

Combined. 

Protein,  Grams  per 
100  c.c.  Solution. 

Per  Cent.  NaOH 
Combined. 

O 

O 

0 

0 

0-4 

9-0 

0-8 

14-4 

0-8 

18-9 

1-6 

27-4 

1-6 

33'3 

3'2 

60-2 

3-2 

60-2 

6-4 

97-0 

6-4 

99'56 

12-8 

99-88 

12-8 

99-67 

From  the  above  table  it  is  clear  that  the  egg-protein  combines 
both  with  acid  and  alkali,  and  it  must  be  conceded  that  Bugarsky 
and  Liebermann  have  by  this  method  clearly  demonstrated  the  am- 
photeric  character.  The  addition  of  protein  to  sodium  chloride  in 
another  form  of  galvanic  cell  produced  no  change  in  electro-motive 
force  ;  the  combination  took  place  only  with  bases  and  acids. 

A.  III.    Depression  of  Freezing-Point  Methods. 

Bugarsky  and  Liebermann  also  employed  this  method.  They 
determined  the  depression  of  the  freezing  point  caused  by  the  addition 
of  definite  quantities  of  protein  to  pure  water  (S).  They  then  added 
the  same  quantities  to  0*05  N  hydrochloric  acid,  sodium  hydroxide 
and  sodium  chloride  solutions,  and  determined  the  depression  in  the 
freezing  points  of  these  solutions.  If  D  be  the  depression  of  the 
freezing  point  of  these  solutions  before  the  addition  of  protein,  and 
A  the  observed  depression  after  addition  of  the  protein,  it  was  found 
in  the  case  of  the  acid  and  the  base  that  A  was  less  than  D  +  S.  In 
the  case  of  the  salt  A  =  approx.  D  +  8.  This  indicated  the  diminu- 
tion of  the  number  of  molecules  in  solution,  due  to  the  combination 
of  the  protein  with  acids  or  bases.  No  combination  took  place  with 
the  salt.  These  experiments  confirm  the  results  obtained  by  the 
electric  potential  method. 

A.  IV.    Hydrolysis  of  Cane-Sugar  and  Esters  by  Acids  and 
Bases  in  Presence  of  Proteins. 

This  method  was  originally  employed  by  Hoffmann  for  deter- 
mining the  free  hydrochloric  acid  in  gastric  contents.  It  has  also 
been  employed  by  O.  Cohnheim  for  estimating  the  combining  powers 
of  various  products  of  protein  digestion  with  hydrochloric  acid,  and 
by  Hardy  for  determining  the  amount  of  hydrolysis  in  the  hydro- 
chloric acid  compounds  of  serum-globulin.  More  recently  still  it 
has  been  applied  by  B.  Moore  for  investigation  of  gastric  contents 


GENERAL  CHEMICAL  CHARACTERS  OF  PROTEINS  45 

in  pathological  cases.     Cane-sugar  on  hydrolysis  is  converted  into  a 
mixture  of  glucose  and  fructose  according  to  the  equation 

C12H13On  +  H20  =  C6H1206  (glucose)  +  C6H12O6  (fructose), 

whilst  methyl  acetate  is  converted  by  hydrolysis  into  a  mixture  of 
methyl  alcohol  and  acetic  acid  :  — 

CH3  .  COOCH3  +  H2O  =  CH3  .  COOH  +  CH3  .  OH. 

The  rate  at  which  these  reactions  take  place  is  proportional  to 
the  concentration  of  the  hydrogen  ions  present  (i.e.,  in  sufficient  dilu- 
tion of  the  acid),  when  the  same  amounts  of  ester  or  sugar  are 
employed  in  comparative  estimations.  If  combination  between  acid 
and  protein  take  place  the  addition  of  the  latter  will  diminish  the 
effective  concentration  of  the  former. 

If  now  two  parallel  experiments  be  carried  out  with  the  same 
concentrations  of  sugar  or  ester,  both  in  the  presence  of  known  (but 
not  necessarily  the  same)  concentrations  of  acids,  but  one  in  the 
presence  of  known  amount  of  protein  and  the  other  without,  then 
according  to  Wilhelmi's  logarithmic  law,  the  amounts  of  sugar  or 
ester  hydrolysed  can  be  represented  by  the  following  equations  :  — 


where  K  is  the  reaction  constant  in  the  experiment  when  protein 
is  absent,  and  K'  the  constant  when  it  is  present,  A  is  the  original 
amount  of  sugar  or  ester,  and  x  and  x  the  amounts  hydrolysed  in 
the  time  /,  in  the  presence  and  absence  of  protein  respectively. 
Then 

K        log  A  -  log  (A  -  x) 
K'       log  A  -  log  (A  -  *')' 

If  now  d  be  the  concentration  of  the  acid  when  no  protein  is 
present  and  Z  be  the  effective  concentration  in  the  parallel  experiment 
with  protein,  then 

K'.d 

z  =  -ir. 

By  subtracting  Z,  found  thus,  from  the  original  concentration,  the 
amount  of  acid  that  had  entered  into  combination  with  the  known 
amount  of  added  protein  can  be  readily  determined. 

Cohnheim  determined  the  combining  powers  of  certain  proteoses, 
prepared  by  the  methods  of  Kuhne  and  Chittenden,  with  the  follow- 
ing results  (at  40°  C.)  :  Prot-albumose  in  a  concentration  of  2^  per 
cent,  combines  with  4*32  per  cent,  of  its  weight  of  hydrochloric  acid 
and  in  a  concentration  of  1*25  per  cent,  with  only  3*5  per  cent.  ;  in  a 
concentration  of  5  per  cent.,  however,  it  combines  with  as  much  as 
4'9  per  cent,  of  its  weight  of  acid.  Deutero-proteose  combines  with 
5*48  per  cent.,  hetero-albumose  with  S'i6  per  cent,  and  antipeptone 
with  15*87  per  cent,  of  their  weights  of  hydrochloric  acid  in  2\  per 
cent,  solutions  at  40°  C. 

With  the  exception  of  antipeptone,  which  is  a  strong  base,  the 
proteoses  investigated  appear  to  combine  with  less  hydrochloric  acid 
in  diminished  concentrations.     This  is  due  to  the  fact  that  in  dilute 
solutions  a  certain  amount  of  hydrolysis  occurs  :  — 
Alb.  Cl  +  H2O  =  Alb,  OH  +  HC1. 


46    THE  GENERAL  CHARACTERS  OF  THE  PROTEINS 

The  method  has  been  applied  by  Hardy  (see  below,  p.  53)  for 
investigating  the  amount  of  hydrolysis  which  takes  place  in  dilute 
solutions  after  a  protein  has  been  neutralised,  the  neutralisation 
point  having  been  determined  by  other  methods. 

The  method  is  of  somewhat  limited  application,  owing  to  the  fact 
that  most  proteins  are  hydrolysed  to  some  extent  even  by  dilute  acids. 

B.   I.  Direct  Titration  in  the  Presence  of  Indicators. 

This  method  is  quite  effective  in  the  case  of  strong  bases,  such 
as  the  protamines.  It  requires  to  be  applied  with  some  care  in  the 
majority  of  cases,  owing  to  a  variety  of  circumstances,  such  as  the 
hydrolysis  of  the  salts  in  dilute  solutions,  and  the  capacity  for  the 
formation  of  acid  and  basic  salts.  Particular  stress  must  also  be 
laid  upon  the  choice  of  indicators.  The  method  is  discussed  in 
some  detail  below,  in  considering  the  researches  on  certain  individual 
proteins. 

B.  II.  The  Determination  of  the  Solubility  of  Proteins  which  are 
Insoluble  in    Water,  in  Acids  and  Bases. 

This  method  is  applicable  to  a  limited  number  of  proteins  only, 
e.g.,  to  the  globulins.  This  is  also  discussed  in  greater  detail  below. 

B.  III.  The  Determination  of  the  Acidity  of  the  Filtrates  from 
Protein  Precipitates  Produced  by  Neutral  Salts  or  Alkaloidal 
Reagents. 

This  method  has  been  employed  by  Spiro  and  Pemsel,  Cohn- 
heim  and  Krieger,  and  von  Rhorer. 

Spiro  and  Pemsel  added  acids  and  alkalis  in  excess  to  protein 
solutions.  They  then  precipitated  the  proteins  by  ammonium  sul- 
phate, and  estimated  the  acid  or  base  remaining  in  the  filtrate.  They 
assumed  that  the  combination  of  acid  or  base  with  protein  could  be 
precipitated  by  salts  in  the  same  way  as  the  protein  itself,  and  arrived 
thus  at  conclusions  as  to  the  amount  of  acid  or  base  which  could 
enter  into  combination  with  proteins.  This  method  has  been  but 
little  employed,  owing  to  the  difficulty  of  maintaining  solutions  of 
ammonium  sulphate  in  a  state  of  complete  neutrality. 

Cohnheim  and  Krieger  employed  a  similar  method,  using,  how- 
ever, alkaloidal  reagents,  assuming  that  the  acid  salt  of  the  protein 
and  the  reagent  enter  into  double  decomposition,  according  to  such 
an  equation  as  the  following  : — 

Protein  hydrochloride  +  Calcium  phosphotungstate  =  Protein  phosphotungstate  +  CaC!2. 

If  to  protein  containing  excess  of  acid,  calcium  phosphotungstate 
be  added,  the  total  acidity  of  the  solution,  as  determined  by  titration, 
would  be  diminished,  owing  to  the  combination  of  acid  and  protein, 
and  subsequent  double  decomposition  of  the  salt  thus  formed  with 
the  alkaloidal  reagent.  Other  reagents  used  were  sodium  picrate, 
calcium  trichloracetate  and  potassium  mercuric  iodide. 

The  method  of  Cohnheim  and  Krieger  was  subjected  to  a  critical 
examination  by  von  Rhorer,  who  has  shown  that,  as  originally 
carried  out,  it  is  not  free  from  certain  errors. 

When,  for  example,  calcium  phosphotungstate  is  used  as  precipi- 


rENERAL  CHEMICAL  CHARACTERS  OF  PROTEINS  47 

tant,  the  filtrate  after  precipitation  of  the  protein  should  contain 
calcium  chloride,  excess  of  calcium  phosphotungstate  and  hydrochloric 
acid.  As  hydrochloric  acid  is  much  stronger  than  phosphotungstic 
the  calcium  salt  of  the  latter  is  decomposed,  and  the  filtrate  contains 
as  a  matter  of  fact  chiefly  calcium  chloride  and  phosphotungstic  acid. 
The  latter  acid  cannot  be  accurately  titrated  with  the  use  of  rosolic 
acid,  which  was  employed  by  Cohnheim  and  Krieger  as  an  indicator. 
Certain  of  the  conclusions  drawn  by  these  observers,  therefore,  as  to 
the  dissociation  of  the  hydrochlorides  of  proteins  are  erroneous. 

Another  source  of  error  has  also  been  discovered  by  von  Rhorer, 
viz.,  that  the  bulky  precipitates  can  adsorb  certain  quantities  of  acid 
from  solution.  If  a  large  excess  of  acid  be  present  part  of  this 
excess  will  be  carried  down  ;  it  can,  however,  be  recovered  by  suffici- 
ently washing  the  precipitate.  The  statement  of  Cohnheim  and 
Krieger  that  the  amount  of  acid  entering  into  combination  with 
the  protein  depends  on  the  amount  originally  present  in  solution  is 
erroneous ;  the  larger  the  quantity  in  solution  the  larger  the  quantity 
carried  down  by  the  precipitate ;  by  thoroughly  washing  the  latter, 
and  estimating  the  acid  in  the  washings,  the  error  due  to  adsorption 
can  be  readily  eliminated. 

Von  Rohrer  found  that  the  precipitation  method  yields  reliable 
results  if  calcium  picrate  or  potassium  mercuric  iodide  be  employed 
as  precipitants  (provided,  of  course,  that  the  precipitates  be  thoroughly 
washed).  By  means  of  the  latter  reagent,  he  estimated  the  equiva- 
lent combining  weight  of  crystallised  egg-albumin  as  981,  whereas 
Sjoqvist  estimated  it  for  dialysed  egg-white  at  800  (see  p.  41). 

Owing  to  its  simplicity,  the  method  seems  worthy  of  further 
application. 

The  Salt  Formation  of  Individual  Proteins. 

The  salt  formation  of  some  individual  proteins  has  been  investi- 
gated in  detail.  Many  of  the  general  principles  mentioned  above 
are  well  illustrated  by  these  investigations.  The  following  will  receive 
some  more  detailed  consideration  : — 

(a)  The  salt  formation  of  edestin,  according  to  the  investigations 
of  Osborne. 

(&)  The  salt  formation  of  caseinogen,  according  to  the  investiga- 
tions of  Lacqueur  and  Sackur. 

(c)  The  salt  formation  of  serum-globulin,  according  to  the  investi- 
gations of  Hardy. 

The  Salt  Formation  of  Edestin  (Osborne). 

Owing  to  the  ease  with  which  edestin  is  obtained  in  quantity,  and 
to  the  fact  that  it  can  be  recrystallised  and  obtained  in  an  apparently 
homogeneous  state,  it  forms  a  very  suitable  substance  for  investigation. 

Osborne  noticed  that  all  the  crystalline  edestin  preparations  ob- 
tained by  the  deposition  of  the  protein  from  warm  salt  solutions  are 
capable  of  neutralising  small  quantities  of  potassium  hydroxide 
solution  when  phenol  phthalein  is  used  as  an  indicator ;  some  even 
are  slightly  acid  to  litmus.  Out  of  twenty  preparations  examined, 

ftr 
eight  required  0-2  to  0-5  c.c.  -  -    potassium  hydroxide  to  produce  a 


48     THE  GENERAL  CHARACTERS  OF  THE  PROTEINS 

neutral  reaction  to  litmus  ;  the  preparations  required  from  0*85  to  1-5 
c.c.  to  produce  a  neutral  reaction  to  phenol  phthalein  when  i  gram  of 
the  protein  was  employed.  The  causes  of  this  acidity  were  investigated 
by  treating  suspensions  of  known  quantities  of  edestin  with  potassium 

/N\ 

hydroxide  ( —  j  solution  until  neutral  with  phenol  phthalein,  filter- 
ing off  the  undissolved  protein  and  certain  quantities  of  protein  pre- 
cipitated by  the  addition  of  alkali  (as  the  edestin  crystals  are  partially 
soluble  in  water,  as  will  be  explained  later),  and  estimating  quantita- 
tively the  constituents  of  the  filtrate.  These  consisted  of  a  certain 
amount  of  organic  matter  together  with  potassium  and  sodium  salts 
of  hydrochloric  and  sulphuric  acids.  The  following  conclusions 
were  drawn  by  Osborne  as  to  the  nature  of  edestin  crystals  :— 

(1)  That  edestin  is  a  basic  body  which  forms  true  salts  with  acids. 

(2)  That  the  preparations,  as  obtained  by  crystallisation  from 
salt  solutions,  react  either  weakly  acid  or  neutral  to  litmus  and  are 
salts  of  a  basic  protein. 

(3)  That  by  the  addition  of  caustic  alkalis  to  these  preparations 
until  the  mixture  no  longer  acts  acid  towards  phenol  phthalein,  these 
salts  can  be  decomposed  ;  by  the  analysis  of  the  filtrate  from  the  pro- 
tein after  this  treatment  the  nature  of  the  salts  can  be  determined. 

(4)  The  edestin  preparations  obtained  by  recrystallisation  from 
sodium  chloride  consist  principally  of  chlorides  (as  the  filtrate  after 
neutralisation  with  alkali  contains  chiefly  chlorides) ;  if  prepared  by 
crystallisation   from    ammonium   sulphate  they   consist    chiefly   of 
sulphates. 

(5)  The  edestin  preparations,  as  ordinarily  prepared  by  crystal- 
lisation from  sodium  chloride,  are  appreciably  soluble  in  water.     The 
part  which  is  soluble  in  water  requires  twice  as  much  alkali  for 
neutralisation,  with  phenol  phthalein  as  indicator,  as  the  part  which 
is  insoluble. 

(6)  If  the  molecular  weight  of  edestin  be  taken  as  14,500,  or 
twice  the  simplest  molecular  weight  as  determined  by  direct  analysis 
(i.e.,  from  C .  H .  N  .  S  and  O  content),  then  the  amount  of  hydrochloric 
acid  combined  in  the  insoluble  portion  would  correspond  to  a  mono- 
hydrochloride,  whereas  that  in  the  soluble  portion  would  correspond 
to  a  dihydrochloride.     The  ordinary  edestin  preparations  are,  there- 
fore, usually  mixtures  of  chlorides,  containing,  however,  a  certain 
quantity  of  sulphate.     The  relative  amounts  of  these  salts  depend 
on  the  relative  amounts  of  chloride  and  sulphate  present  in  the 
liquids  used  either  in  the  original  extractions  or  in  the  recrystallisa- 
tions. 

It  is  of  interest  to  note  that  all  the  edestin  preparations,  whether 
free  base,  sulphate  or  chloride,  have  the  same  crystalline  form.  The 
protein  part  of  the  molecule  is  so  large  in  comparison  with  that  of 
the  combined  acid  that  the  latter  exerts  no  influence  on  the  form  of 
the  crystals.  Analogous  instances  of  isomorphism  are  known  in  the 
case  of  certain  minerals,  and  also  in  the  case  of  haemoglobin  and  its 
derivatives  (e.g.,  O  and  CO  haemoglobin).  In  the  above-mentioned 
experiments  the  method  of  direct  neutralisation  was  employed  (me- 
thod B  I.) ;  another  series  was  carried  out  with  the  object  of  de- 
termining the  amount  of  the  free  base  edestin  (which  is  insoluble 
in  water)  which  is  soluble  in  acids  of  given  strength  (method  B  II.). 


GENERAL  CHEMICAL  CHARACTERS  OF  PROTEINS  49 

An  edestin  preparation,  almost  neutral  to  phenol  phthalein,  was 
obtained  by  allowing  the  crystals  to  separate  from  a  sodium  chloride 
solution  containing  sufficient  sodium  hydroxide  solution  to  neutralise 
the  acid ;  the  amount  necessary  was  determined  by  the  titration  of 
a  small  aliquot  part  of  the  salt  solution  in  the  presence  of  phenol- 
phthalein.1  Portions,  each  of  a  gram,  of  this  preparation  were  sus- 

N 
pended  in  20  c.c.  of  liquid  containing  quantities  of  —      hydrochloric 

acid  varying  from  2-14  c.c.,  in  a  series  of  stoppered  bottles.  After 
shaking  for  two  hours,  and  allowing  suspended  matter  to  settle,  10 
cc.  of  clear  liquid  were  decanted  off,  and  the  amount  of  edestin  in  the 
solution  was  estimated  ;  the  acid  contents  of  the  solution  and  residue 
were  also  determined,  and  the  distribution  of  the  acid  between  the  dis- 
solved and  undissolved  edestin  thereby  ascertained.  Similar  experi- 
ments were  carried  out  with  other  acids  and  also  with  alkalis.  The 
results  obtained  by  this  method  of  experiment  may  be  briefly  sum- 
marised as  follows : — 

(1)  The  free  base  edestin,  if  suspended  in  water,  requires  some- 
what more  than  that  amount  of  acid  to  dissolve  it  than  is  necessary 
to  form  a  dihydrochloride,  on  the  assumption  that  edestin  has  the 
molecular  weight  14,500.     If  the  acid  be  added  little  by  little  to  the 
suspension  practically  no  solution  takes  place  till  more  than  half 
this  quantity  has  been  added;  the  insoluble  monohydrochloride  is 
first  formed.     Somewhat  more  than  the  theoretical  amount  of  acid 
is  necessary  to  produce  complete  solution  owing  to  the  formation  of 
a  more  basic  hydrolysis  product  being  formed,  which  is  insoluble  in 
water  (edestan). 

(2)  The  sulphates  of  edestin  are  less  soluble  than  the  chlorides, 
and  the  existence  of  definite  compounds  has  not  been  ascertained ; 
ten  times  more  sulphuric  acid  than  hydrochloric  acid  is  necessary  to 
dissolve  a  given  quantity  of  edestin.     Acetic  acid,  on  the  other  hand, 
dissolves  nearly  the  theoretical  amount  (2  mol.  acid :   I  mol.  edestin), 
as  in  this  case  little  of  the  basic  bye-product  is  formed.     Phosphoric 
acid  acts  as  a  monobasic  acid,  giving  salts  of  the  type  B' .  HJPO.  and 
B"(H2P04)2. 

(3)  In  addition  to  acting  as  a  base,  edestin  can  also  act  as  an 
acid ;  for  solution  of  a  given  quantity  of  edestin  one  molecular  equi- 
valent of  sodium  or  potassium  hydroxide  to  one  molecular  equivalent 
of  edestin  is  necessary ;  the  solutions  of  the  sodium  and  potassium 
salts  readily  become  turbid,  owing  apparently  to  hydrolysis.     Rela- 
tively larger  quantities  of  the  carbonates  and  of  ammonium  hydroxide 
are  necessary  to  bring  about  solution. 

With  reference  to  edestin,  the  chief  points  of  interest  are  that  the 
existence  of  definite  salts  both  with  acids  and  bases  can  be  ascer- 
tained; with  hydrochloric  acid  both  a  mono-  and  dihydrochloride 
can  be  prepared,  of  which  the  latter  only  is  soluble  in  water ;  this 
latter  salt  as  well  as  the  sodium  and  potassium  edestin  compounds 
have  a  peculiarity,  viz.,  they  are  insoluble  in  the  presence  of  minute 
quantities  of  a  neutral  salt,  although  they  dissolve  in  more  con- 
centrated solutions ;  in  such  solutions  they  show  the  ordinary  pro- 
perty of  globulins. 

1  Full  details  of  the  preparation  of  the  free  edestin  are  given  in  the  original  paper. 


So    THE  GENERAL  CHARACTERS  OF  THE  PROTEINS 

Many  similar  results  with,  however,  some  marked  contrast,  have 
been  obtained  by  Hardy  in  his  investigation  on  serum-globulin ; 
these  analogies  and  contrast  will  be  referred  to  later. 

The  Salt  Formation  of  Caseinogen  (Lacqueur  and  Sackur). 

W.  A.  Osborne  showed  that  the  salts  of  caseinogen  could  be 
divided  into  two  classes,  viz.,  those  of  the  alkaline  earths  and  those 
of  the  alkalis,  which  can  be  distinguished  from  one  another  by  the 
facts  that  the  former  form  opalescent  solutions  and  cannot  be 
filtered  through  a  Martin  gelatin  filter,  whilst  the  latter  form  quite 
clear  solutions  and  can  be  filtered  through  gelatin.  Osborne  clearly 
recognised  the  acid  character  of  caseinogen  and  its  salt -forming 
capacity. 

Various  attempts  have  been  made  to  determine  quantitatively  the 
amount  of  different  bases  necessary  to  neutralise  a  given  amount  of 
caseinogen,1  but  the  most  accurate  determinations  are  due  to  Lac- 
queur and  Sackur.  They  showed  that  the  discrepancies  of  the 
different  observers  are  due  to  the  fact  that  the  calculations  as  to  com- 
bining weights  are  made  with  reference  to  the  air-dried  caseinogen, 
instead  of  the  substance  dried  at  110°  C.  This  is  important  when 
it  is  remembered  that  caseinogen  preparations  are  somewhat  hy- 
groscopic. 

Lacqueur  and  Sackur  confirmed  other  investigators  in  their 
statement  of  the  fact  that  solutions  of  caseinogen  in  alkali,  which  are 
alkaline  to  litmus,  are  acid  to  phenol  phthalein.  They  showed  further- 
more that  with  phenol  phthalein  perfectly  sharp  neutralisation  points 
could  be  obtained  with  various  alkalis,  both  by  direct  titration  and 
by  the  addition  of  alkali  in  excess,  and  subsequent  titration  of  this 
excess  with  acids.  They  found  as  a  means  of  several  concordant 
experiments  that  i  gram  of  caseinogen  (calculated  as  free  from 

N 
water)  was  capable  of  neutralising  8*8 1  c.c.  of  —  sodium  hydroxide 

solution.  The  amount  of  water  in  each  sample  titrated  was  esti- 
mated by  drying  at  110°  C. ;  the  percentages  of  water  were  found  to 
vary  between  8'2  and  15*5. 

Lacqueur  and  Sackur  also  determined  the  electrolytic  conduc- 
tivity of  solutions  of  caseinogen,  which  has  been  neutralised  by 
sodium  hydroxide  in  the  presence  of  phenol  phthalein  in  various 
dilutions,  with  a  view  of  ascertaining  the  basicity  of  the  acid  casein- 
ogen, as  Ostwald  and  Walden  have  shown  that  the  more  polybasic 
an  acid  is,  the  greater  is  the  decrease  in  the  amount  of  dissociation 
when  the  solution  of  its  sodium  salt  is  concentrated.  This  dissocia- 
tion influences,  of  course,  the  conductivity,  and  if  Al  represent  the 
equivalent  conductivity  at  dilution  vl  and  A2,  the  equivalent  con- 
ductivity at  dilution  z/2,  then  between  dilutions  32  and  512  (i.e.,  I 
gram  equivalent  in  32  litres  and  I  gram  equivalent  in  512  litres) 

— J— j — 2  has  the  following  average  values  :    for  dibasic  acids   0*15, 

•^•i 

for  tribasic  acids  0*22,  for  tetrabasic  acids  0*29,  for  pentabasic  acids 
0*35,  and  for  hexabasic  acids  0*39. 

1  The  reference  to  these  earlier  investigations  is  given  in  Lacqueur  and  Sackur's 
paper. 


GENERAL  CHEMICAL  CHARACTERS  OF  PROTEINS  51 

N 
Lacqueur  and  Sackur  added  to  —  sodium  hydroxide  solutions 

the  calculated  quantities  of  caseinogen  necessary  to  neutralise  it  (a 
solution  in  which  v  =  20  was  thereby  obtained) ;  this  was  diluted  to 
varying  concentrations,  and  the  conductivities  determined  with  the 
following  results : — 

Per  Cent.  Caseinogen.  v  (Dilution).  A  (Equivalent  Conductivity). 
2-84                                       40  46-5 

1-42  80  51-3 

071  160  56-2 

o-355  320  63-0 

0-1775  640  69-5 

Whence   A™~A^  =  0-33. 

•^640 

From  this  it  follows  that  caseinogen  is  at  least  a  tetrabasic  acid. 

N 
Now    as    i  gram  neutralises   8'8i   c.c.  —   sodium   hydroxide,   its 

equivalent    combining  weight  is  -     -  =1135.     On  the  assumption 

O  ool 

that  caseinogen  is  a  tetrabasic  acid  its  molecular  weight  would  be 
4540,  or,  on  the  assumption  that  it  is  hexabasic,  6810. 

The  sodium  salts  of  caseinogen  can,  like  other  protein  salts, 
undergo  hydrolysis  in  solution.  The  solution  of  caseinogenate  of 
sodium,  which  is  obtained  by  just  neutralising  caseinogen  with 
sodium  hydroxide,  is  slightly  opalescent  and  the  opalescence  dis- 
appears on  addition  of  excess  of  alkali.  Furthermore,  the  point  of 
neutralisation,  when  litmus  is  employed  as  indicator,  varies  very 
appreciably  with  the  dilution  of  the  solution.  The  condition  of  equi- 
librium may  be  represented  by  the  equation 

Kas.  nNa  +  nH2O  ^  Kas.  nH  +  nNaOH ; 
or  possibly  acid  salts  may  be  formed — 

Kas.  nNa  +  mH2O  f£  Kas  (n  -  m)Na  +  mNaOH 

(cf.  Hardy1  on  serum-globulin). 

The  statements  with  regard  to  hydrolysis  have  been  confirmed 
by  Lacqueur  and  Sackur  by  the  measurement  of  the  internal  friction 
of  sodium  caseinogenate  solutions.  The  magnitude  of  the  internal 
friction  depends  chiefly  on  the  concentration  of  the  caseinogen  ions ; 
very  small  quantities  of  free  acid  diminish  the  -friction  (thus  setting 
free  caseinogen  from  its  salts),  whilst  correspondingly  small  quantities 
of  alkali  increase  it. 

The  Salt  Formation  of  Serum-Globulin  (Hardy). 

To  determine  the  combining  powers  of  acids  and  bases  with  serum- 
globulin  Hardy  employed  two  of  the  chemical  methods  (B  I.  and  B 
II.),  viz.)  direct  titration  and  determination  of  the  amount  of  globulin 
(which  is  insoluble  in  pure  water)  soluble  in  given  quantities  of  acids 
and  bases. 

By  the  second  of  the  two  methods  the  more  accurate  results  were 
obtained.  Various  acids  of  the  concentration  0*005  N  were  added 
to  suspensions  of  globulins  containing  from  0*28  to  4*18  grams  in 

1  See  p.  53- 


52    THE  GENERAL  CHARACTERS  OF  THE  PROTEINS 

100  c.c.  The  acid  was  in  each  case  added  gradually  until  the  mix- 
ture was  only  slightly  opalescent  and  matched  a  given  standard. 
The  amount  of  acid  necessary  to  produce  this  given  degree  of  opal- 
escence  was  thereby  determined.  A  large  number  of  determinations 
at  different  temperatures  were  carried  out.  If  the  mean  amount  of 
hydrochloric  acid  necessary  to  produce  this  grade  of  solution  of  i 
gram  of  globulin  be  taken  as  unity,  the  relative  amounts  of  other 
acids  (given  in  equivalents)  necessary  to  produce  the  same  result  is 
given  in  the  following  table  : — 

Monobasic  Acids.  Dibasic  Acids.  Tribasic  Acids. 

HC1  ro  H2SO4  rgi  Citric  acid  3-0 

HNO3  0*995  Tartaric  acid  1-994  H,PO4        2-9 

CHC12.COOH  ro  Oxalic  acid      i-g  H^BO,        Very  large  excess 

CC13.COOH  ro 

CH2C1 .  COOH  1-05 

H  .  COOH  1-25 

CH3.COOH  5-2 

CH2.CH3.COOH  7-56 

It  will  be  noticed  here  that  the  solvent  power  of  strong  acids  is  a 
molecular  function,  and  that  HC1  =  H2SO4  =  H3PO4.  It  may  be 
recalled  that  Osborne,  in  the  case  of  edestin,  also  observed  that 
HC1  =  H3PO4)and  that  salts  of  the  type  B  .  H3PO4  are  obtained. 
The  weaker  acids  require  relatively  far  larger  quantities  to  produce 
the  same  grade  of  solution  ;  this  is  due  to  the  readiness  with  which 
salts  undergo  hydrolysis  in  dilute  solutions. 

Generally  the  results  obtained  indicate  that  serum-globulin  forms 
salts  of  the  same  type  as  the  amino-acids,  i.e.,  salts  in  which  a  mole- 
cule of  acid  and  base  combine  to  form  additive  compounds  without 
replacement : — 

/NH2  /NH2.HC1 

CH2/  +  HC1  =  CH2/ 

\COOH  \COOH 

Similar  experiments  were  carried  out  with  bases.  Taking  NaOH  as 
unity,  the  relative  solvent  actions  may  be  represented  by  the  following 
figures  : — 

KOH  i 

NaOH  i 

NH4.OH  0-98 

Ba(OH)2  2-008 

Urea  and  aniline  also  dissolve  serum-globulin,  but  the  quantitative 
relationships  were  not  determined.  One  point  of  considerable  interest 
appears  from  these  numbers,  viz.,  ammonia,  which  is  a  weak  base, 
has  practically  the  same  solvent  power  as  sodium  and  potassium 
hydroxides.  Now  the  weak  acids  like  acetic  acid  have  considerably 
less  solvent  power  than  the  strong  mineral  acids,  and  these  facts 
indicate  that  serum-globulin  has  more  decidedly  marked  acidic  than 
basic  functions.  In  this  respect  it  differs  markedly  from  the  plant 
globulin  edestin. 

In  respect  to  its  action  on  bases,  the  behaviour  of  globulin  is  some- 
what peculiar  in  that  I  molecule  of  sodium  hydroxide  is  equivalent 
to  i  molecule  of  barium  hydroxide. 

Measurements  of  the  acidity  and  basicity  of  globulin  by  titration 
in  presence  of  indicators  were  also  carried  out.  Freshly  precipitated 
and  washed  globulin  reacts  as  acid  to  dialysed  litmus,  gives  no  colour 


GENERAL  CHEMICAL  CHARACTERS  OF  PROTEINS  53 

with  phenol  phthalein,  and  only  slightly  depresses  the  orange  tint  of 
methyl  orange.  Such  a  reaction  might  be  due  to  the  carbonic  acid 
held  in  combination  by  the  protein. 

On  titration  with  alkalis  in  the  presence  of  phenol  phthalein  certain 
marked  phenomena  were  observed.  It  was  noticed  that  just  half  as 
much  sodium  hydroxide  or  potassium  hydroxide  was  necessary  to 
produce  solution  as  was  necessary  to  produce  a  permanent  red  solu- 
tion ;  in  the  case  of  barium  hydroxide,  on  the  other  hand,  the  point 
of  solution  and  the  point  of  neutralisation  to  phenol  phthalein  coin- 
cided. These  facts  suggest  that  globulin  has  two  replaceable  hydro- 
gens, and  can  form  acid  salts,  of  which  those  of  sodium  and  potassium 
are  soluble,  and  that  of  barium  insoluble.  The  same  relative  amount 
of  ammonia  as  of  sodium  and  potassium  hydroxide  is  necessary  to 
produce  solution  ;  as  might  be  expected,  however,  the  neutralisation 
point  with  phenol  phthalein  is  somewhat  indeterminate.  It  was  found, 
as  a  general  result  of  the  neutralisation  method,  that  10  x  10  ~  5 
equivalents  of  alkali  were  necessary  for  the  solution  of  I  gram  of 
globulin,  and  20  x  10  ~ 5  were  necessary  for  neutralisation  with 
phenol  phthalein  as  indicator  ;  20  x  10  ~  5  equivalents  of  strong 
acids  were  also  necessary  to  produce  solution. 

It  is  of  interest  to  compare  those  numbers  with  the  numbers 
obtained  by  Hardy  for  dialysed  acid  and  alkali  albumin  from  egg- 
white  : — 

Pink  to  Phenol- 
Solution,  phthalein. 

Acid  albumin  from  egg-white                Na(OH)                27-3  57 

'475  gram  per  100  c.c.                        NH4(OH)             29  100 

Ba(OH)2              57  65 
Alkali  albumin  from  egg-white              Na(OH)                36 

*363  gram  per  100  c.c.                       NH^OH)             37  — 

Ba(OH)2  77 

Here  again  the  molecular  and  not  the  equivalent  quantities  of 
base  exert  the  same  solvent  action,  and  there  is  evidence  of  the 
formation  of  acid  and  basic  salts. 

Further  investigations  were  made  as  to  the  acid  and  basic 
functions  of  serum-globulin  by  the  employment  of  physical  methods. 

By  means  of  conductivity  methods  the  basicity  of  globulin  was 

determined.     The  value  — -1— - — ^    (see  Lacqueur  and  Sackur's  work 

«i 

above,  p.  50)  between  ^  =  32  and  v  =32x32  was  determined;  as 
a  result,  it  was  concluded  that  globulin  is  pentabasic. 

The  hydrolysis  of  both  the  acid  and  basic  salts  was  determined 
by  ascertaining  the  rate  of  inversion  of  cane-sugar,  and  of  hydrolysis 
of  methylacetate  by  acids  and  bases  in  the  presence  of  globulin  salts. 
Owing  to  the  change  of  the  latter  in  the  presence  of  acids,  no  very 
conclusive  results  were  obtained  as  to  the  hydrolysis  of  the  acid  salts. 
The  results,  such  as  they  were,  indicated  under  the  conditions  of 
experiments  a  distinct  amount  of  hydrolysis : — 

Glob.  HC1  +  HaO  =  Glob.  OH  +  HC1. 

With  alkalis,  under  similar  conditions,  but  little  hydrolysis  was 
indicated.  With  a  concentration  of  2576  grams  of  globulin  in  a 
litre  neutralised  by  17-12  x  lo"5  equivalents  of  NaOH  for  each 
gram  of  globulin,  the  hydrolysis,  as  indicated  by  methylacetate 
catalysis,  was  only  o'288  per  cent,  *>.,  only  0-288  per  cent,  of  the 


54    THE  GENERAL  CHARACTERS  OF  THE  PROTEINS 


sodium  globulin  compound  was  hydrolysed  by  water  under  the  con- 
ditions of  the  experiments. 

Measurements  were  also  made  of  the  conductivities  of  the  differ- 
ent salts  in  gradually  increasing  concentrations.  It  was  found  that 
in  the  case  of  the  hydrochloride  the  molecular  conductivity  increases 
much  more  for  increase  of  volume  than  does  the  conductivity  in  the 
case  of  the  sodium  hydroxide  compound.  This  is  due  to  the  fact 
that  the  acid  functions  of  globulin  are  far  more  marked  than  its  basic 
functions,  for  from  the  equation 

My  =  (i  -  *)/*y  +  */*HC1  or  NaOH, 

where  My  is  the  total  conductivity,  x  the  fraction  of  the  salt 
hydrolysed,  yu,y  the  conductivity  of  the  non-hydrolysed  salt,  and 
/^HCI  or  NaOH  the  conductivity  of  the  salt  or  acid,  when  yu,Hci  or  NaOH  is 
greater  than  //,y  (as  is  the  case  with  the  globulin  salts),  the  more  x 
increases  with  dilution  the  greater  My  must  become.  In  the  case 
of  the  sodium  hydroxide  compound  of  globulin  the  increase  of  con- 
ductivity with  dilution  is  not  markedly  greater  than  it  is  in  the  case  of 
the  inorganic  salts  mono-  and  disodium-hydrogen  phosphates  ;  there  is 
little  evidence  of  hydrolysis.  In  the  case  of  the  hydrochloride  the 
conductivity  determinations  indicate  marked  hydrolysis. 

Determinations  were  also  made  of  the  ratios  of  the  conductivities 
of  solutions  of  various  acids  and  salts,  both  alone  and  after  satura- 
tion with  globulin.  In  the  case  of  very  weak  acids,  such  as  boracic 
acid,  when  a  large  amount  of  hydrolysis  would  be  expected  from  the 
equation 


My  would   be   nearly   equal  to  //,acid.     This  is  as  a  matter  of  fact 
the  case,   for       alt  -  =   0*9.     In  the  case  of  hydrochloric  acid, 

M  boracic  acid 

where  the  amount  of  hydrolysis  is  comparatively  small,  the  value 


is  0*24.     In  the  case  of  ammonia,  the  free  base  conducts  but 

Af  acid 

little  ;  in  fact,  distinctly  less  than  the  salt  formed  by  the  combination 
of  globulin  and  ammonia,  and  the  value       alt  --  is  2*3. 

/^ammonia 

All  these  facts  lead  to  the  conclusion  that  globulin  forms  with 
alkalis  salts  which  readily  undergo  ionisation  and  are  good  con- 
ductors, but  which,  in  contradistinction  to  the  acid  salts,  are  hydro- 
lysed but  little  with  water. 

These  salts  of  serum-globulin  have  certain  characteristic  properties 
which  are  not  shared  with  ordinary  salts.  It  has  already  been  men- 
tioned that  the  solubility  of  globulin  in  acids  was  determined  by 
adding  acids  to  a  suspension  until  a  definite  grade  of  solution  was 
reached,  which  in  most  cases  was  that  of  minimal  opalescence  (a 
process  described  by  Hardy  as  that  of  matching).  Conversely,  if 
such  a  solution  be  dialysed  against  distilled  water,  acid  passes  out, 
and  the  globulin  solution  becomes  more  and  more  opaque,  without 
the  separation  at  any  time  of  a  solid  phase.  Such  an  action  Hardy 
ascribes  to  hydrolysis  and  the  formation  of  basic  salts,  which  would 
take  place  according  to  the  equation 
*GHAc 


where  G  represents  globulin  and  Ac  acid. 


GENERAL  CHEMICAL  CHARACTERS  OF  PROTEINS  55 
With  bases  (B)  a  similar  reaction  would  take  place — 

xGE  +  jHOH  =  (GH)y(GB)x_y  +  yBOH. 

With  increase  in  the  value  y\x>  the  size  of  the  molecules  of  the 
globulin  salt  molecules  would  increase  until  finally  they  are  large 
enough  to  diffract  white  light.  Such  molecules  take  part  in  electric 
transport,  and  their  velocity,  as  measured  indirectly  by  conductivity 
and  by  the  "  boundary  "  method,  is  exceptionally  high,  much  higher, 
in  fact,  than,  according  to  Ostwald's  law,  could  be  accounted  for  by 
ions  containing  such  a  large  number  of  atoms.  When  large  mole- 
cules, such  as  the  globulin  salts,  become  ionised  and  take  part  in 
electrical  transport,  they  are  said,  according  to  Hardy,  to  form  "  pseudo- 
ions,"  and  when  the  magnitude  of  these  latter  become  sufficiently 
large,  they  attain  the  properties  of  matter  in  mass,  being  defined  by 
a  surface,  and  moving  under  the  influence  of  a  surface  contact  differ- 
ence of  potential. 

Somewhat  similar  to  the  phenomena  just  mentioned  is  the  forma- 
tion of  opalescent  solutions  of  caseinogen  salts.  In  spite  of  these 
peculiarities  there  is  considerable  evidence  of  a  true  chemical  re- 
action between  serum-globulin  and  acids  and  bases.  It  is  also 
possible  that  globulin  forms  compounds  with  salts  of  the  type  GNaCl, 
which  readily  hydrolyse  with  water.  This  would  account  for  the  fact 
that  such  compounds  are  only  stable  in  the  presence  of  a  large  excess 
of  salt,  i.e.,  they  are  soluble  only  in  comparatively  concentrated  salt 
solutions,  from  which  they  are  reprecipitated  on  dilution.  A  globulin 
acid  salt  is  also  but  slightly  soluble  in  dilute  salt  solutions,  owing  to 
the  double  decomposition — 

GHAc  +  NaCl  =  GNaCl  +  HAc. 

The  globulin  alkali  salts,  however,  are  more  readily  soluble  in  salt 
solutions  than  simple  globulin.     This  Hardy  considers  to  be  due  to 
the  compounds  in  question  being  of  the  following  types  : — 
/NHa.HCl  .,NH2.NaCl 

R\  R\ 

\COOH  \COOH 

for  the  compounds  of  acids  and  salts.  The  one  could  only  be  formed 
from  the  other  by  double  decomposition.  The  compounds  with 
bases  would  be  formed  by  the  replacement  of  the  hydrogen  in  the 
carboxyl  group. 

The  above  chemical  considerations  go  far  to  explain  the  peculiar 
solubility  conditions  of  the  globulin  type  of  proteins. 

The  Question  of  Pseudo-acid  and  Pseudo-base  Formation. 

Cohnheim  has  expressed  the  opinion  that  proteins  may  belong  to 
that  class  which  Hantzsch  has  termed  pseudo-acids  and  pseudo-bases. 
Of  such  a  class  typical  examples  are  the  nitro-paraffins,  e.g.,  nitro- 
ethane.  This  body  can  exist  in  the  two  forms — 

CH3 .  CH2  .  NO2  True  nitro-form  which  is  a  neutral  body. 

CH3 .  CH  :  NO  .  OH       Pseudo  nitro-form  which  is  an  acid  body. 

In  the  presence  of  alkali  the  true  nitro-form  is  slowly  converted  into 
the  pseudo-form — 

CHS .  CH2  .  N0a  +  NaOH  =  CH3 .  CH  :  NO  .  ONa  +  H2O. 

5 


56    THE  GENERAL  CHARACTERS  OF  THE  PROTEINS 
| 

If  the  sodium  salt  thus  obtained  be  acidified  it  is  reconverted  into  the 
free  acid  and  sodium  chloride — 

CH3 .  CH  :  NO  .  ONa  +  HC1  =  CH3  .  CH  :  NO  .  OH  +  NaCl. 
Such  a  solution  has  at  first  the  electrolytic  conductivity  of  the  acid 
pseudo-form  +  that  of  sodium  chloride.  After  a  time,  however,  the 
pseudo-form  gradually  reverts  to  the  true  nitro-form,  the  conductivity 
diminishes,  and  the  solution  attains  finally  the  conductivity  due  to 
sodium  chloride  alone.  In  a  like  manner  the  neutralisation  of  the 
true  nitro-body  does  not  take  place  immediately,  but  there  is  a  certain 
latent  period.  The  higher  the  temperature  the  shorter  is  this  period. 
Similarly  certain  pseudo-bases  have  been  shown  to  exist,  and 
both  are  characterised  by  this  latent  period  of  neutralisation.  The 
conductivity  changes,  moreover,  when  neutralisation  takes  place,  are 
characterised  by  a  high  temperature  coefficient,  owing  to  the  influence 
of  the  increased  temperature  on  the  rate  of  change. 

Neither  the  latent  period  of  neutralisation  nor  the  high  tempera- 
ture coefficient  for  the  conductivity  has  been  observed  by  Hardy  in 
his  investigations  on  the  serum-globulin,  and  he  comes  to  the  conclu- 
sion that  the  hypothesis  of  Cohnheim  that  proteins  act  as  pseudo-acids 
and  pseudo-bases  is  not  justified  by  experimental  facts.  Similar 
conclusions  have  also  been  arrived  at  by  a  different  experimental 
method  by  von  Rhorer. 

In  concluding  this  section,  emphasis  must  be  laid  upon  the 
anomalous  behaviour  in  many  respects  of  the  proteins  on  treatment 
with  acids  and  bases.  This  behaviour  is  probably  to  be  ascribed  to 
their  capacity  as  colloids  to  adsorb  inorganic  substances,  to  which 
reference  has  been  already  made  in  the  introduction.  This  fact 
renders  it  often  impossible  to  discriminate  between  physical  adsorption 
and  chemical  combination,  and  for  this  reason  some  of  the  conclusions 
recorded  above  must  be  accepted  with  reserve. 

SECTION   XVII.— THE  PRECIPITATION  OF  PROTEINS  BY  SALTS 
OF  THE  HEAVY  METALS. 

It  has  already  been  mentioned  that  the  addition  of  salts  of  the 
heavy  metals,  such  as  those  of  copper,  mercury  and  lead,  to  protein 
solutions  produce  precipitates.  Numerous  attempts  have  been  made 
to  determine  the  composition  of  such  precipitates  and  to  isolate 
definite  protein  salts  of  the  heavy  metals.  There  is  a  large  literature 
on  the  subject,  and  the  various  investigators  have  arrived  at  results 
which  are  by  no  means  concordant.  The  precipitates,  which  have 
received  the  largest  amount  of  investigation,  are  those  produced  by 
the  addition  of  copper  salts.  Certain  of  the  products  isolated  have 
a  relatively  large  copper  content,  as  the  following  analyses,  due  to 
Ritthausen,  of  vegetable  protein  precipitates  show  : — 

CuO.  Ash. 

"  Gluten-caseinogen  "  from  wheat  16-97 

Legumin  from  peas                                            I5'6i  i'2i 

„       from  broad  beans                             14-10  3-05 

,,       from  oats  13 '53 

Conglutin  from  lupines                                i3'38-ii-6o  o043-2'i6 

The  copper  precipitate  obtained  from  milk  caseinogen  also  shows  a 
high  copper  content — 127  to  13*6  percent.,  according  to  the  analyses 
of  Ritthausen  and  Pott. 

Very  widely  differing  results  have  been  obtained  by  analyses  of 


GENERAL  CHEMICAL  CHARACTERS  OF  PROTEINS  57 

the  precipitate  obtained  by  adding  copper  salts  to  a  solution  of  egg- 
white.  Harnack,  by  precipitating  in  the  presence  of  excess  of  pro- 
tein, obtained  a  precipitate  containing  1*35  per  cent.  Cu;  when, 
however,  he  precipitated  in  presence  of  excess  of  the  copper  salt,  he 
obtained  a  product  containing  2*64  per  cent.  Cu.  Other  investiga- 
tors have  obtained  products  in  which  the  percentage  of  copper  varied 
between  07  and  4' 15  per  cent.  Equally  unsatisfactory  and  variable 
are  the  results  obtained  by  the  precipitation  with  salts  of  other  heavy 
metals.1 

The  formation  of  the  precipitates  in  question  has  more  recently 
formed  the  subject  of  investigations  by  Galeotti  and  by  Pauli,  who 
have  called  attention  to  the  complexity  of  the  question. 

Galeotti  noticed  that  if  a  3  per  cent,  albumin  solution  be  allowed 

N 

to  fall,  drop  by  drop,  into  an  —  copper  sulphate  solution,  a  thick  pre- 
cipitate first  forms,  which  redissolves  on  the  addition  of  an  excess 
of  protein,  so  that  finally  a  homogeneous  solution  is  obtained.  If 
more  copper  sulphate  be  added  to  this  clear  solution  a  precipitate  is 
formed  again,  which  will  redissolve  on  addition  of  excess  of  protein. 
If  an  albumin  solution  be  added,  drop  by  drop,  to  a  concentrated 
copper  solution,  a  precipitate  will  form  as  the  drops  first  enter  the 
salt  solution,  but  will  disappear  on  shaking ;  on  addition  of  more 
albumin  a  precipitate  continues  to  be  formed,  which  dissolves  less 
and  less  readily  after  each  addition,  until  finally  it  becomes  per- 
manent. If,  on  the  other  hand,  concentrated  copper  sulphate  be 
added  to  a  protein  solution  a  precipitate  is  formed,  which  gradually 
dissolves  on  the  addition  of  excess  of  the  salt,  giving  a  clear  green 
solution  which  contains  protein  in  large  quantities. 

Silver  salts  behave  in  a  somewhat  different  way.  If  an  albumin 
solution  be  allowed  to  drop  into  a  I  per  cent,  silver  nitrate  solution 
a  flocculent  precipitate  forms,  which  redissolves  in  an  excess  of  pro- 
tein. If,  on  the  other  hand,  a  solution  of  silver  nitrate  be  allowed  to 
fall  into  an  albumin  solution,  no  precipitate  forms  until  a  certain 
definite  quantity  of  the  salt  has  been  added ;  at  this  point  a  pre- 
cipitate commences  to  form,  which  increases  in  quantity  with  each 
additional  drop  of  the  salt.  If  albumin  be  added  again,  the  pre- 
cipitate redissolves. 

Galeotti  draws  from  his  investigations  the  following  conclusions : 
I.  Proteins  form  no  definite  compounds  of* constant  composition 
with  salts  of  the  heavy  metals ;  the  precipitates  which  form  when 
protein  solutions  and  solutions  of  salts  of  the  heavy  metals  are 
mixed  are  simply  loose  compounds,  the  composition  of  which 
depends  on  the  conditions  of  precipitation.  II.  The  precipitation 
phenomena  are  often  reversible,2  in  the  sense  that  the  precipitates 
are  soluble  in  excess  of  either  reagent.  III.  The  composition  of 
the  precipitate  depends  on  the  composition  of  the  supernatant  liquid 
and  is  determined  by  the  thermodynamical  laws  of  chemical  equili- 
brium. IV.  For  the  system  albumin  (egg  or  serum),  water  and  salt 

1 A  table  of  these  results  is  given  in  Galeotti's  paper.  References  to  the  earlier 
literature  are  given  in  Harnack's  paper. 

2  Galeotti  uses  the  expression  reversible,  but  only  in  the  sense  described  in  the 
text,  i.e.,  solubility  on  adding  excess  of  either  reagent.  The  reversibility  is  to  be  dis- 
tinguished from  that  of  the  precipitation  by,  e.g.,  salts  of  alkalis,  where  the  precipitates 
redissolve  on  addition  of  water. 

5* 


58     THE  GENERAL^  CHARACTERS  OF  THE  PROTEINS 

(copper  sulphate  or  silver  nitrate),  it  is  possible  to  solve  the  problem 
of  chemical  equilibrium  by  a  graphical  method,  and,  given  the  per- 
centage composition  of  a  complex,  to  determine  into  how  many 
phases  it  will  separate,  and  the  composition  of  each  phase. 

Pauli  has  investigated  in  some  detail  the  conditions  of  precipita- 
tion by  zinc  sulphate.  He  found  that  there  were  two  maxima  of  pre- 
cipitation when  this  salt  was  added  to  an  egg-protein  solution  of  a 
certain  strength.  The  precipitating  power  increased  gradually  be- 
tween concentrations  corresponding  to  'OOI  to  0*05  normal.  From 
this  point  the  precipitating  power  gradually  decreased,  until  the 
concentration  corresponding  to  that  of  a  normal  solution  was  reached. 
From  this  point  onwards  till  the  concentration  2  N  was  attained, 
no  precipitation  whatever  took  place.  On  increasing  the  concentra- 
tion beyond  this  point,  however,  precipitation  recommenced,  and 
increased  with  increasing  strength  of  the  salt  solution  until  a  second 
maximum  was  attained.  The  precipitates  obtained  with  the  lower 
dilution  were  irreversible,  that  is  to  say,  they  would  not  redissolve  on 
addition  of  water  ;  those  obtained  at  the  higher  dilution  were,  on  the 
other  hand,  reversible  and  redissolved  on  dilution  of  the  supernatant 
fluid.  The  numbers  just  given  refer  only  to  solutions  containing  a 
definite  amount  of  egg-protein.  In  this  particular  case  the  limits 
between  which  the  maximum  formation  of  the  irreversible  precipi- 
tate and  the  incipient  formation  of  the  reversible  precipitate  took 
place  were  0*05  and  2  N.  These  limits  are  wider  with  a  lower 
protein  concentration  and  narrower  with  a  higher  concentration. 

These  examples  are  sufficient  to  indicate  the  extremely  complex 
conditions  governing  the  composition  of  the  precipitates  produced 
when  solutions  of  the  salts  of  heavy  metals  are  added  to  protein 
solutions.  In  the  majority  of  cases  compounds  of  definite  chemical 
composition  cannot  be  isolated.  This  statement  does  not,  however, 
preclude  the  possibility  that  certain  proteins  of  more  acidic  character, 
such  as  caseinogen,  should  form  salts  of  definite  chemical  com- 
position, and  further  investigation  of  precipitates  with  high  copper 
content,  such  as  those  derived  from  plant  proteins  and  caseinogen, 
seems  desirable. 

Various  theories  have  been  advanced  to  account  for  the  nature 
of  the  precipitates  produced  by  salt  precipitation.  These  have  been 
summarised  in  the  paper  of  Pauli  referred  to.  They  may  be  more 
fittingly  discussed  in  dealing  with  the  general  chemical  physics  of 
colloidal  solutions  and  the  theory  of  salt  precipitation  of  colloids.  In 
the  present  state  of  knowledge  the  precipitates  produced  by  the  salts 
of  the  heavy  metals  cannot  be  regarded  as  of  sufficiently  definite 
chemical  nature  as  to  make  them  of  value  in  fixing  the  characters  of 
the  protein  from  which  they  are  derived,  and  for  this  reason  they 
have  been  treated  in  a  somewhat  cursory  manner. 

SECTION  XVIII. — THE  OXIDATION  OF  THE  PROTEINS. 

In  recent  years  the  chemical  examination  of  proteins,  with  a 
view  to  elucidation  of  the  constitution,  has  been  confined  chiefly  to 
the  study  of  the  hydrolysis  products.  This  method,  apart  from  the 
value  of  the  results  yielded,  is  a  logical  one,  in  view  of  the  fact  that 
all  evidence  with  regard  to  the  biological  utilisation  points  to  the 
fact  that  the  first  stage  of  protein  degradation  is  one  of  hydrolysis. 


GENERAL  CHEMICAL  CHARACTERS  OF  PROTEINS  59 

Nevertheless  several  investigations  on  the  direct  oxidation  of 
proteins  without  previous  hydrolysis  deserve  mention. 

Oxidation  with  Permanganate. 

The  oxidation  with  permanganate  solution  has  been  the  subject 
of  repeated  studies.1  The  chief  investigations  are  due  to  Maly  and 
von  Furth.  Other  investigators  were  Be*champ,  Sabbotin,  Pott, 
Briicke,  Chandelon,  Low,  Siegfried,  Bondzynski  and  Zoja,  Bernert 
and  Ehrmann. 

Maly,  under  the  name  of  oxyprotosulphonic  acid,  described  a  pro- 
duct which  he  obtained  by  oxidising  egg-white  with  half  its  weight 
of  potassium  permanganate  in  the  cold.  Under  the  name  of  peroxy- 
proteic  acid  he  described  a  product  which  was  obtained  by  slowly 
adding  small  portions  of  permanganate  to  a  protein  solution,  at  room 
temperature,  until  only  very  slow  oxidation  took  place.  This  acid, 
isolated  by  precipitation  with  salts  of  heavy  metals  (mercury, 
lead,  etc.),  gave  a  marked  biuret  reaction,  but  was  not  precipitated 
by  the  ordinary  alkaloidal  reagents.  On  gentle  treatment  with 
baryta  water  a  large  amount  of  ammonia  was  evolved,  and  separation 
of  oxalic  acid  in  the  form  of  its  barium  salt  took  place.  By  con- 
tinued hydrolysis  with  baryta,  lasting  for  several  days,  glutamic  acid, 
leucine,  formic,  acetic  and  ben  zoic  acids  were  obtained. 

Further  investigations  on  the  oxyprotosulphonic  acid  from  egg- 
white  were  carried  out  by  Bernert  and  Ehrmann. 

The  most  complete  of  the  recent  investigations  on  the  perman- 
ganate oxidation  products  are  due  to  von  Furth.  He  oxidised 
caseinogen  with  four  times  its  weight  of  potassium  permanganate  at 
room  temperature,  the  reaction  taking  several  weeks  to  complete. 
A  product  was  obtained  which  was  resistant  to  further  action  of  the 
oxidising  reagent.  This  was  shown  to  consist  of  at  least  three  pro- 
ducts of  high  molecular  weight,  which  gave  the  biuret  reaction,  but 
not  the  Millon,  xanthoproteic  or  Hopkins  reactions,  and  which 
could  be  separated  by  fractional  precipitation  with  silver  nitrate 
(A),  lead  acetate  (B),  and  mercuric  acetate  (C).  From  the  three 
peroxyproteic  acids  thus  obtained,  the  esters  could  be  readily  pre- 
pared by  means  of  alcoholic  hydrochloric  acid.  On  treating  these 
acids  with  barium  hydroxide  a  scission  took  place  of  oxalic  acid,  in 
the  form  of  its  barium  salt ;  there  was  also  a  considerable  loss  of 
nitrogen.  The  substances  obtained  in  this  way  were  designated  by 
von  Furth  as  desamino-proteic  acids,  and  they  yielded  on  hydrolysis 
glutamic  acid,  leucine,  benzoic  acid  and  ammonia.  Unlike  the 
oxyproteic  acids,  from  which  they  were  derived,  they  were  no  longer 
resistant  to  further  oxidation  with  permanganate ;  the  scission  of  the 
oxalic  groups  had  left  a  new  position  of  weakness  in  the  molecule, 
and  the  desamino-acids  readily  oxidised  on  further  addition  of  the 
oxidising  agent,  yielding  a  mixture  of  substances  of  a  new  class 
called  the  kyroproteic  acids,  which  gave  a  marked  biuret  reaction. 
By  means  of  lead  acetate,  these  could  be  separated  into  acids  which 
contain  a  large  quantity  of  oxygen,  which  could  be  readily  oxidised 
further.  The  kyroproteic  acids,  furthermore,  on  treatment  with  nitrous 
acid,  readily  lose  half  their  nitrogen,  relatively  five  times  as  much  as  is 
lost  by  caseinogen  by  similar  treatment. 

*A  succinct  account  of  the  earlier  literature  is  given  in  von  Fiirth's  paper,  1905. 


6o    THE  GENERAL,CHARACTERS  OF  THE  PROTEINS 

There  is  not  sufficient  experimental  material  to  draw  any  very 
definite  conclusions  as  to  the  course  of  oxidation  of  the  proteins,  but 
some  suggestions  of  Hofmeister  seem  reasonable.     If  the  typical 
polypeptide  grouping  of  a  protein  be  represented  as  follows— 
— NH— CH  .  CO— NH  .  CH— CO- 

I  I 

R  R' 

the  first  stage  of  the  oxidation  would  be — 

— NH— CH— CO— NH  .  CH— CO- 
COOn  COOH 
from  which,  by  CO2  scission,  the  grouping 

— NH— CH2 .  CO— NH  .  CH2 .  CO— 
would  be  formed,  which  on  further  oxidation  would  yield  a  group 

— NH  .  CO .  CO— NH .  CO  .  CO— 

From  such  a  group,  by  hydrolysis,  oxalic  acid  and  ammonia  would 
be  obtainable.  It  is  of  interest  to  note  that  Zickgraf,  Seemann,  and 
Kutscher  and  Schenck  have  obtained  by  the  oxidation  of  proteins 
oxaluramide — 

CO    —    NHX 

I  >o 

CO.NH2NH2/ 

which  contains  the  complex  — NH— CO— CO— NH— 

The  hypothesis  is,  however,  insufficient  to  explain  all  the  facts 
connected  with  the  oxidation,  as  the  amount  of  amide  nitrogen, 
which  can  be  eliminated  with  nitrous  acid,  does  not  correspond  with 
the  amount  of  oxalic  acid. 

Oxidation  with  Hydrogen  Peroxide  and  Ozone. 

The  oxidation  of  proteins  by  hydrogen  peroxide  has  been  studied 
by  Wurster  and  by  F.  N.  Schulz,  and  the  action  of  ozone  has  been 
studied  by  v.  Gorup-Besanez  and  Harries  and  his  pupils.  Wurster 
and  Schulz  noticed  that  egg-albumin  (Wurster  used  egg-white  solu- 
tion and  Schulz  the  crystallised  product)  on  standing  with  excess  of 
hydrogen  peroxide  in  neutral  solution  at  37°  C.  deposited  after  a 
time  the  protein  in  an  insoluble  form.  The  product  thus  obtained 
was  subjected  to  a  detailed  examination  by  Schulz,  who  found  that 
it  did  not  differ  very  greatly  from  the  original  protein  in  its  per- 
centage composition.  The  ratio  of  hydrogen,  carbon  and  nitrogen 
was  practically  unchanged,  but  it  contained  about  2'6  per  cent,  more 
oxygen.  Schulz  designated  this  substance- oxyftrotem,  and  he  showed 
that,  unlike  the  oxyproteic  acids,  it  yielded  the  ordinary  protein  re- 
actions. It  represents,  therefore,  a  simple  oxidation  product. 

Blumenthal  and  Neuberg  have  shown  that  gelatin,  in  the  pre- 
sence of  an  iron  or  copper  salt,  yields,  on  oxidation  with  hydrogen 
peroxide,  acetone.  The  same  product  has  been  obtained  by  Orgler 
from  egg-albumin,  using  the  same  method. 

The  action  of  ozone  on  caseinogen  has  recently  formed  the  sub- 
ject of  an  extensive  research  by  Harries  and  Langheld.  By  pro- 
longed action  of  ozone  on  the  sodium  salt  considerable  chemical 
change  took  place.  A  product  was  obtained  which  gave  a  marked 
biuret  reaction,  but  no  reaction  with  the  xanthoproteic,  Millon  or 
Hopkins  reagents  (cf.  oxyproteic  acids).  It  gave  a  precipitate  with 


GENERAL  CHEMICAL  CHARACTERS  OF  PROTEINS  61 

phenylhydrazine,  indicating  the  presence  of  aldehydic  and  ketonic 
groups,  and  could  be  separated  into  three  fractions  by  means  of 
phosphotungstic  acid  and  lead  acetate.  This  operation  was  carried 
out  as  follows :  the  original  product  was  precipitated  by  phospho- 
tungstic acid  (in  the  presence  of  sulphuric  acid) ;  to  the  substance, 
regenerated  by  barium  hydroxide  from  this  precipitate,  lead  acetate 
was  added,  and  the  greater  part  precipitated  (fraction  A) ;  the  filtrate 
from  the  lead  precipitate  formed  the  second  fraction  (B,  i.e.,  the 
fraction  precipitable  by  phosphotungstic  acid,  but  not  by  lead 
acetate);  from  the  filtrate  from  the  phosphotungstic  precipitate  a 
third  fraction  was  obtained  (C),  which  was  not  precipitable  with  lead 
acetate.  These  three  fractions  were  hydrolysed  by  Emil  Fischer's 
method,  but  no  very  essential  difference  between  them  could  be 
detected.  Fraction  C  yielded,  however,  practically  no  leucine,  where- 
as fractions  A  and  B  did.  The  other  amino-acids  obtained  by 
hydrolysis  were  alanine,  valine,  aspartic  and  glutamic  acids.  Glycine 
and  proline  could  not  be  isolated.  It  is  noteworthy,  furthermore, 
that  tyrosine,  phenylalanine  and  tryptophane  appeared  to  be  absent ; 
it  seems  probable  that  ozone  had  attacked  the  aromatic  groups  of 
the  protein  molecule. 

Action  of  Nitric  Acid. 

The  principal  product  obtained  by  the  oxidation  of  nitric  acid  is 
oxalic  acid.  On  carefully  dissolving  proteins  in  nitric  acid  and 
afterwards  adding  water,  yellow  substances,  known  as  xantho-pro- 
teins,  can  be  obtained.  These  have  been  investigated  by  von  Furth 
(Habilitationsschrift,  Strassburg,  1899). 

SECTION  XIX.— THE  ACTION  OF  HALOGENS  ON  PROTEINS. 

Investigations  on  the  action  of  halogens  on  proteins  date  back  to 
1848,  when  Mulder  described  a  "protein  chlorous  acid,"  which  he 
obtained  as  a  precipitate  when  chlorine  was  passed  into  a  solution  of 
egg-albumin. 

Since  that  date  the  preparation  of  halogen  derivatives  of  proteins 
has  been  the  subject  of  numerous  investigations ;  owing,  however,  to 
the  complexity  of  the  possible  reactions,  and  the  variations  in  the 
composition  of  the  products  obtained  under  different  conditions  of 
experiment,  the  preparation  of  halogen  derivatives  has,  up  to  the 
present,  been  but  little  applied  to  the  characterisation  of  individual 
proteins  ;  the  composition  of  the  products  depends  too  much  on  the 
details  of  the  preparation. 

Chlorine  Derivatives  of  Proteins. 

In  more  recent  times  the  chlorine  derivatives  have  been  studied 
by  Rideal  and  Stewart,  Hopkins  and  Pinkus,  Blum  and  Vaubel, 
Habermann  and  Ehrenfeld,  and  by  Panzer.  Rideal  and  Stewart, 
and  Hopkins  both  confirmed  the  older  observation  of  Mulder  with 
regard  to  the  formation  of  a  precipitate  when  chlorine  is  passed  into 
a  protein  solution,  and  the  two  former  investigators  proposed  to 
found  upon  this  reaction  a  method  for  the  quantitative  determina- 
tion of  proteins. 

Hopkins  and  Pinkus  passed  chlorine  into  a  cold  protein  solution 
till  the  latter  was  saturated,  when  a  thick  precipitate  suddenly 
formed;  this  was  purified  by  solution  in  a  I  per  cent,  sodium  hydroxide 


62     THE  GENERAL  CHARACTERS  OF  THE  PROTEINS 

solution,  and  precipitation  from  the  latter  by  dilute  acetic  acid. 
From  egg-albumin  (not  crystalline)  a  product  containing  3*62  per 
cent,  of  chlorine  was  obtained.  By  a  modification  of  the  method,  pro- 
ducts containing  other  quantities  of  chlorine  could  be  obtained.  Thus 
by  chlorinating  in  the  presence  of  potassium  chlorate,  dissolving  the 
precipitate  thus  formed  in  alcohol,  and  adding  ether  to  the  alcoholic 
solution,  a  derivative  was  obtained  which  contained  6-41  per  cent,  of 
chlorine.  As  will  be  noticed  later,  a  definite  series  of  bromine 
derivatives  could  be  obtained  from  proteins,  each  with  a  constant 
amount  of  bromine,  by  varying  the  method  of  preparation.  It  was 
not  found  possible  to  obtain  such  a  definite  series  either  with  chlorine 
or  iodine  preparations. 

Blum  and  Vaubel  prepared  chlorine  preparations  from  proteins 
in  the  presence  of  sodium  hydroxide ;  they  state  that  it  is  impossible 
to  obtain  products  containing  the  maximum  amount  of  combined 
chlorine  in  the  presence  of  free  acid,  which  is  formed  by  the  action  of 
halogen  on  the  protein ;  consequently  they  carried  out  the  reactions 
in  the  presence  of  sodium  hydroxide,  which  was  added  from  time  to 
time  to  neutralise  the  acid  as  it  was  formed  in  the  reaction.  They 
obtained  from  egg-albumin  and  caseinogen  preparations  containing 
2  per  cent,  of  chlorine. 

Habermann  and  Ehrenfeld  prepared  a  chlorine  derivative  from 
caseinogen.  They  dissolved  100  grams  of  the  protein  in  700 
c.c.  of  5  per  cent,  potassium  hydroxide  solution,  to  which  was  added 
50  grams  of  potassium  chlorate;  through  this  solution  hydrogen 
chloride  gas  was  passed.  After  completion  of  the  reaction  the 
liquid  was  filtered  off  from  the  potassium  chloride  formed  during 
the  reaction,  and  diluted  with  water,  whereupon  the  chloro  derivative 
separated,  which  contained  between  13  and  14  per  cent,  of  halogen. 

Panzer  also  prepared  a  chlorine  derivative  of  caseinogen.  He  made 
a  paste  of  i  kilogram  of  the  protein  with  4  litres  of  20  per  cent, 
hydrochloric  acid ;  to  this  450  grams  of  potassium  chlorate  were 
added  in  small  quantities  at  a  time,  and  considerable  evolution  of  heat 
took  place.  After  cooling  water  was  added,  and  the  undissolved  sub- 
stance filtered  off.  This  was  a  chlorine  derivative  containing  about 
8*3  per  cent,  of  chlorine — considerably  less  than  that  in  the  prepara- 
tion which  Habermann  and  Ehrenfeld  obtained  by  a  similar  method. 

Bromine  Derivatives  of  Proteins. 

Some  preliminary  investigations  on  the  action  of  bromine  on 
proteins  were  published  by  Loew,  but  most  of  our  knowledge  on  this 
subject  is  due  to  the  investigations  of  Hopkins  and  Pinkus.  As 
already  mentioned,  they  obtained  different  products  with  definite 
bromine  content  by  varying  the  methods  of  preparation.  They 
obtained  three  distinct  bromine  derivatives  from  egg-albumin. 
Derivative  I.  was  obtained  by  treating  the  protein  solution  in  the 
cold  with  bromine  until  the  solution  was  distinctly  coloured ;  a 
precipitate  (crude  bromination  product)  formed  suddenly ;  this  was 
dissolved  in  I  per  cent,  sodium  hydroxide,  from  which  it  was 
precipitated  by  the  addition  of  acetic  acid.  The  precipitate  was 
dialysed  against  water,  and  then  washed  with  alcohol,  in  which  it 
is  only  slightly  soluble.  It  contained  3*92  per  cent,  of  bromine. 
Derivative  II.  was  prepared  by  dissolving  the  crude  bromination 


GENERAL  CHEMICAL  CHARACTERS  OF  PROTEINS  63 

product  when  still  moist  in  hot  alcohol,  and  allowing  the  solution  to 
drop  into  ether  ;  a  product  was  thereby  obtained  which  was  easily 
soluble  in  alcohol,  and  which  could  be  purified  by  repeated  solution 
in  this  solvent  and  reprecipitation  with  ether.  It  contained  10*82 
per  cent,  bromine.  Derivative  III.  was  prepared  by  dissolving  the 
moist  crude  bromination  product  in  alcohol  containing  bromine,  and 
pouring  the  solution  thus  obtained  into  ether  containing  bromine. 
A  product  resulted  which,  after  washing  with  ether,  contained  14*9 
per  cent,  of  bromine. 

These  derivatives  can  be  converted  one  into  the  other.  Thus, 
for  example,  by  dissolving  derivative  II.  in  sodium  hydroxide  solution, 
and  then  adding  acetic  acid,  a  product  containing  only  about  4  per 
cent,  bromine  can  be  obtained.  Conversely,  if  derivative  I.  be 
added  to  alcohol  containing  bromine,  and  the  solution  thus  obtained 
be  thrown  into  ether  containing  bromine,  a  product  is  obtained 
which  contains  about  15  per  cent,  bromine  (derivative  III.). 

Derivatives  of  the  third  class,  containing  the  largest  percentage 
of  bromine,  were  prepared  from  several  other  proteins.  The 
bromine  content  of  the  derivatives  thus  obtained  may  be  regarded 
as  characteristic  for  each  protein.  From  varying  fractions  of  egg- 
albumin  substances  containing  from  1279-16*48  per  cent,  halogen 
were  obtained  ;  from  serum  of  different  fractions  the  bromine  deriva- 
tives contained  from  12*1 5-12-94  per  cent ;  from  serum-globulin  they 
contained  from  13*53-14*03  per  cent.  The  bromine  derivative  of 
caseinogen  contained  11*17  Per  cent,  that  of  proto-albumose  16*30- 
17*12  per  cent.,  and  of  deutero-albumose  17*63  per  cent. 

It  was  not  found  possible  to  obtain  such  definite  series  of 
derivatives  of  chlorine  or  iodine  derivatives  ;  nevertheless,  evidence 
was  obtained  that  such  series  existed,  although  substances  with  definite 
halogen  content  were  not  always  obtainable.  It  was  not  found  possible 
either  to  obtain  iodine  derivatives,  corresponding  to  derivative  III. 

Blum  and  Vaubel  also  obtained  bromine  derivatives  of  proteins, 
using  the  method  already  mentioned,  viz.)  treating  with  halogen  in 
slightly  alkaline  solution ;  from  egg-albumin  and  caseinogen  they 
obtained  products  with  between  4  and  5  per  cent  of  bromine. 

Iodine  Derivatives  of  Proteins. 

The  earlier  investigations  on  the  iodine  derivatives  are  due  to 
Bohm  and  Berg,  and  Jendrassik.1  The  two  former  noticed  the  de- 
colorisation  of  iodine  by  protein  solutions,  and,  by  coagulation,  iso- 
lated a  product  from  which,  by  dialysis  and  washing,  the  iodine  could 
be  removed.  Jendrdssik  determined  the  amount  of  iodine  which 
could  be  decolourised  by  a  protein  solution.  Other  investigations 
were  published  later  by  Liebrecht  and  by  Lepinois,  who  obtained 
products  containing  respectively  17*8  and  21*6  per  cent  iodine,  part 
of  which,  at  any  rate,  was  in  stable  combination.  The  chief 
systematic  investigations  on  the  iodine  derivatives,  apart  from  the 
ones  on  the  halogen  derivatives  generally  of  Hopkins  and  Pinkus, 
and  Blum  and  Vaubel,  already  mentioned,  are  those  of  Hofmeister, 
Kurajeff  and  C.  H.  L.  Schmidt. 

Hofmeister  worked  with  crystallised  egg-albumin.  He  treated 
20  grams  dissolved  in  400  c.c.  water  with  10  grams  potassium 

1  These  earlier  investigations  are  discussed  in  Hofmeister's  paper. 


64  THE  GENERAL, CHARACTERS  OF  THE  PROTEINS 

iodide,  5  grams  potassium  iodate,  and  4  c.c.  concentrated  sulphuric 
acid  for  four  hours  on  a  water-bath.  A  brown  precipitate  was  thereby 
obtained,  which  was  dissolved  in  ammonia  and  precipitated  from  this 
solution  by  acetic  acid ;  this  solution  and  precipitation  was  repeated 
several  times,  and  a  product  was  obtained,  which,  after  washing  with 
potassium  iodide  and  then  water,  was  found  to  contain  8*93  per  cent, 
of  iodine. 

Kurajeff  carried  out  a  series  of  experiments  under  varying  condi- 
tions. The  treatment  with  iodine  was  carried  out  at  40°,  both  in  acid 
solutions  and  in  the  presence  of  magnesium  carbonate ;  he  used  as 
source  of  iodine  in  some  experiments,  potassium  iodide  and  iodate 
in  the  presence  of  acids,  in  others  iodine  dissolved  in  potassium 
iodide,  with  small  quantities  of  iodate.  When  crystallised  serum- 
albumin  was  treated  with  these  varying  mixtures  at  40-50°  for  from 
three  to  seven  days,  preparations  were  obtained  containing  from 
about  10-12  per  cent,  of  iodine.  By  means  of  varying  mixtures  at 
100°  (one  to  six  hours),  preparations  containing  between  11*48  and 
1 2*28  per  cent,  of  iodine  were  obtained. 

Hofmeister's  method  appears  to  give  more  constant  results. 
With  egg-albumin  (crystallised)  at  the  lower  temperature,  with 
iodine,  potassium  iodide  and  potassium  iodate,  preparations  con- 
taining from  8-29-8-42  per  cent,  iodine  were  obtained.  When, 
however,  potassium  iodide,  with  iodic  and  sulphuric  acids,  was  used 
(five  days  at  40°  C),  a  preparation  containing  only  5-94  per  cent  of 
iodine  was  obtained.  It  may  be  recalled  that  Hofmeister's  preparation , 
obtained  by  treatment  with  potassium  iodide  and  iodic  and  sulphuric 
acid  for  four  hours  at  90-100°,  contained  8-93  per  cent,  iodine. 

Blum  and  Vaubel  claim  to  be  able  to  obtain  products  with  con- 
stant iodine  content  by  their  method  already  referred  to  ;  they 
propose  to  designate  this  the  Blum- Vaubel  iodine  number,  and  to 
make  the  preparation  under  the  following  conditions :  The  protein 
is  either  dissolved  or  suspended  in  water,  to  which  sodium  bicar- 
bonate is  added,  and  the  mixture  is  then  warmed  to  40-50°  C. 
Iodine  dissolved  in  potassium  iodide  solution  is  then  added  in  small 
quantities  at  a  time,  till  the  iodine  colour  becomes  permanent  (i.e., 
does  not  disappear  after  half  an  hour).  The  mixture  is  then  cooled 
and  filtered,  sodium  hydroxide  is  added  in  excess,  and  immediately 
afterwards  acetic  acid.  If  necessary  alcohol  or  acetone  is  added 
to  complete  the  precipitation.  The  precipitate  is  purified  by  reso- 
lution in  alkali  and  reprecipitation  by  acid,  and  then  washed  by 
water  and  alcohol  until  the  washings  are  free  from  iodine.  The  per- 
centage of  iodine  contained  in  the  dried  preparation  is  the  "  iodine 
number  "  of  the  protein.  The  iodine  numbers  found  for  various  pro- 
teins by  Blum  and  Vaubel  are  as  follows  :  Serum-globulin,  8'45  ; 
serum-albumin  (preparations  by  different  methods),  iix>2  and  9^93  ; 
" -muscle-albumin,"  1037  ;  egg-albumin,  7*1. 

The  above  examples  show  sufficiently  the  variations  in  the  iodine 
content  of  preparations  prepared  by  different  methods. 

Properties  of  the  Halogen  Derivatives  of  the  Proteins  and  Nature  of 
the  Action  of  the  Halogens. 

The  properties  of  the  halogen  derivatives  have  been  to  a  great 
extent  indicated.  They  are  readily  soluble  in  alkaline  solutions, 


GENERAL  CHEMICAL  CHARACTERS  OF  PROTEINS  65 

from  which  they  can  be  precipitated  by  means  of  acids.  Some  of 
them  are,  however,  soluble  in  excess  of  acid.  The  higher  bromine 
derivatives  are  soluble  in  alcohol,  but  insoluble  in  ether,  chloroform, 
benzene  and  other  organic  solvents.  They  cannot  be  precipitated 
from  their  solution  in  alkali  by  the  majority  of  the  alkaloidal  reagents, 
although  they  can  be  "  salted  out "  by  the  addition  of  ammonium 
sulphate.  None  of  them  have  been  obtained  in  a  crystalline  form. 
They  give  the  biuret  reaction,  but  not  the  reactions  of  Millon  or 
Adamkiewicz  (Hopkins). 

The  possible  reactions  are  very  complicated,  for  the  amount  of 
hydrochloric,  hydrobromic  or  hydriodic  acid  eliminated  in  the  re- 
action is  far  larger  than  that  which  can  be  accounted  for  by  the  mere 
substitution  of  hydrogen  by  halogen.  Concurrent  oxidation  must 
also  take  place. 

Some  light  has  recently  been  thrown  on  the  action  of  chlorine  on 
amino  bodies  by  the  researches  of  Raschig  and  of  Cross,  Bevan  and 
Briggs. 

Raschig  has  shown  that  chlorine  and  alkaline  hypochlorites  act 
upon  ammonia  with  the  formation  of  chloramines  : — 

NH3  +  M'OCl  =  NH2C1  +  M'OH. 

Chloramine  is  capable  of  reacting  with  iodides  with  the  liberation 
of  free  iodine  : — 

NH2C1  +  2HI  =  NH3  +  HC1  +  I2. 

Proteins  seem  to  undergo  a  similar  reaction,  and  it  is  suggested 
by  Cross,  Bevan  and  Briggs  that  such  a  reaction  may  serve  as  a 
measure  of  the  reactive  amino  groups  in  the  protein  molecule.  It  is 
possible  that  the  treatment  with  hypochlorites  in  alkaline  solution 
will  bring  about  a  simple  substitution,  and  that  by  means  of  the 
iodide  reaction  the  chloramine  groups  in  the  protein  molecule  can 
be  estimated.  Evidence  has  already  been  brought  to  show  that  the 
hypochlorite  does  not  react  to  such  an  extent  as  free  chlorine.  It 
is,  furthermore,  only  the  chlorine  in  the  chloramine  radical  which 
sets  free  iodine  from  combination  with  iodides.1 

The  action  of  halogens  is,  however,  far  more  complex  than  mere 
substitution  in  the  sense  of  the  chloramine  reaction.  Substitution 
may  take  place  in  groups  other  than  the  amino  groups.  Attention 
has  been  already  called,  furthermore,  to  the  fact  that  far  more  of  the 
hydrogen  halide  is  set  free  in  the  reaction  than  can  be  accounted 
for  by  mere  substitution.  Oxidation  must  take  place  concurrently 
with  substitution.  Some  idea  as  to  the  reaction  may  be  obtained  by 
the  comparison  of  the  empirical  constitution  of  the  halogen  de- 
rivative with  that  of  the  original  body.  Hofmeister,  KurajefT  and 
the  other  investigators  give  several  analyses  which  throw  light  on 
this  point  One  example  will  suffice,  viz.,  the  analysis  of  crystallised 
egg-albumin,  and  its  iodo  derivative  as  prepared  by  Hofmeister : — 

c.  H.  N.  i.  s.  o. 

Albumin          53'28  7-26  15*00  i«i8  23-28 

lodalbumin     47^92  6'6o  I4'i7  8-95  1*26  2foo 

From  these  numbers  it  will  be  evident  that  in  the  formation  of  the 

1  Further  research  on  this  " chloramine  factor"  is  necessary.  A  method  is  sug- 
gested in  the  paper  of  Cross,  Bevan  and  Briggs,  which  is,  however,  only  of  a  prelimin- 
ary character. 


66     THE  GENERAL  CHARACTERS  OF  THE  PROTEINS 

iodo  derivative  some  carbon  complex  which  is  poor  in  nitrogen  has 
been  eliminated  from  the  molecule ;  this  Hofmeister  assumes  to  be 
a  carbohydrate  group. 

Again,  Blum  and  Vaubel,  by  their  method  of  forming  these 
halogen  derivatives  in  the  presence  of  alkalis,  bring  some  evidence 
to  show  that  a  separation  of  some  sulphur  body  takes  place,  although 
this  probably  does  not  happen  when  other  methods  are  employed. 

Another  significant  fact  with  regard  to  the  properties  of  the 
halogen  derivatives  is  their  failure  to  give  a  positive  result  when 
tested  by  the  Millon  and  Adamkiewicz  (Hopkins)  reaction.  This 
fact  indicates  either  that  the  aromatic  groups  are  so  substituted  by 
halogen  that  they  fail  to  give  these  reactions,  or  that  they  are  en- 
tirely destroyed. 

Investigations  on  the  groups  that  have  been  eliminated  during 
halogenisation  have  been  undertaken  by  Schmidt,  who  has  isolated  the 
simpler  bye-products  of  the  reaction.  He  has  shown  that  ammonium 
iodide  and  ammonium  iodate  are  always  formed  when  the  iodine  deriva- 
tives are  prepared  from  egg-albumin  by  the  Hofmeister  reaction.  This 
indicates  the  scission  of  some  amido  group.  Investigations  with 
simpler  bodies,  such  as  ammonium  salts,  urea,  arginine,  aspartic  acid 
and  guanidine,  showed  that  iodine  is  capable  of  causing  the  scission 
of  NH2  groups  from  those  bodies  where  the  group  is  combined 
through  a  carboxyl  or  imido  group  to  the  molecule,  such  as  in  urea 
and  in  guanidine.  In  other  bodies,  such  as  aspartic  acid,  where  the 
NH2  group  is  directly  united  to  a  carbon  atom,  no  iodate  could 
be  detected  as  a  bye-product  of  the  reaction.  The  reaction  with 
ammonium  salts  may  be  represented  by  the  following  equation : — 

6(NH4)2SO4  +  61  +  aH2O  =  5NH4I  +  NH4IO3  +  6NH4HSO4. 

It  appears,  therefore,  from  the  somewhat  limited  number  of  Schmidt's 
experiments,  that  the  estimation  of  the  free  ammonium  salts  elimin- 
ated may  form  a  measure  of  the  number  of  amido  groups  in  the 
protein  molecule.  The  reaction  is,  however,  somewhat  complicated, 
and  the  scission  of  amido  groups  cannot  be  directly  measured  by 
the  iodate  eliminated,  for,  owing  to  concurrent  oxidation,  relatively 
large  quantities  of  hydriodic  acid  are  formed  simultaneously,  and 
this,  when  it  reaches  a  certain  concentration,  reduces  the  iodate 
according  to  the  following  equations: — 

HI  +  NH4IO3  =  NH4I  +  HIO3. 
HIO3  +  sHI  =  61  +  aH2O. 

The  amount  of  iodate  formed  can,  therefore,  only  reach  a  certain 
limit. 

Other  bye-products  isolated  by  Schmidt  are  iodoform,  carbonic, 
formic  and  acetic  acids,  and  possibly  also  para-iodopyrocatechin. 
These  have  been  estimated  quantitatively,  and  their  formation  is 
ascribed  to  the  destruction  of  the  tyrosine  complex.  Certain  con- 
clusions of  Schmidt's  later  papers  are  not  in  full  concordance  with 
those  arrived  at  earlier,  especially  with  reference  to  the  formation 
of  iodates  only  by  certain  amino  groups. 

Sufficient  has  been  said  to  show  how  complex  are  the  possible 
reactions  which  can  take  place  when  proteins  are  treated  with 
halogens.  Nevertheless,  it  is  conceivable  that  certain  standard  con- 
ditions for  halogenisation  can  be  fixed,  by  means  of  which  halogen- 


GENERAL  CHEMICAL  CHARACTERS  OF  PROTEINS  67 

protein  derivatives  can  be  prepared  with  fixed  halogen  content,  which 
could  serve  for  the  characterisation  of  individual  proteins.  The 
bromination  method  of  Hopkins  and  Pinkus,  and  the  iodination 
method  of  Blum  and  Vaubel,  might,  under  certain  stringent  specified 
conditions,  be  employed,  and  in  this  way  a  factor  obtained  for  the 
characterisation  analogous  somewhat  to  the  "  Hiibl  number "  for 
fats.  The  suggestion  of  Cross,  Bevan  and  Briggs  for  a  "chlor- 
amine  "  number  is  also  worthy  of  further  attention. 

SECTION  XX. — THE  ACTION  OF  NITROUS  ACID  ON  PROTEINS. 

When  proteins  are  treated  with  nitrous  acid  a  considerable  froth- 
ing and  evolution  of  nitrogen  takes  place.  This  action  has  formed 
the  subject  of  many  investigations.  Schiff,  on  treatment  of  egg- 
proteins  with  nitrous  acid,  obtained  a  product  which  no  longer  gave 
the  biuret  reaction,  which  was  insoluble  in  water,  and  to  which  he 
gave  the  name  desamido-albumin,  on  the  assumption  that  nitrous 
acid  had  destroyed  the  amido  groups  (z>.,  groups  containing  the 
complex  —  CO  .  NH2).  The  action  of  nitrous  acid  on  proteoses  and 
peptones  formed  the  subject  of  investigations  by  Paal  and  Schrotter, 
who  obtained  products  differing  in  many  properties  from  the  original 
substances.  In  more  recent  times  the  action  of  nitrous  acid  has 
formed  the  subject  of  investigations  by  Levites,  and  more  especially 
by  Skraup  and  his  pupils.  Both  these  investigators  failed  to  confirm 
the  observation  of  Schiff,  that  the  product  of  the  reaction  yields  no 
biuret  reaction.  Levites  found,  moreover,  that  the  products  contained 
as  much  amide-nitrogen  as  the  original  bodies.  Skraup  and  his 
pupils  have  prepared  these  desamido-proteins  from  several  pro- 
teins (caseinogen,  gelatin,  serum-globulin),  and  subjected  them  to 
hydrolysis.  They  found  that,  with  one  exception,  the  hydrolysis  pro- 
ducts did  not  differ  very  essentially  from  the  original  proteins.  They 
failed,  however,  to  isolate  lysine  from  the  desamido-proteins,  although 
this  base  was  obtainable  from  the  proteins  themselves.  The  ele- 
mentary compositions  also  did  not  differ  very  greatly  from  those 
of  the  proteins ;  the  ratios  of  the  carbon,  hydrogen  and  nitrogen 
were  approximately  the  same;  in  the  case  of  caseinogen  thedesamido 
body  contained  considerably  less  phosphorus  than  the  protein  from 
which  it  was  derived.  The  yield  of  desamido  body  varied  consider- 
ably with  the  different  proteins,  although  approximately  the  same 
methods  of  preparation  were  employed  (mixture  of  sodium  nitrite 
and  protein  solution  treated  with  acetic  acid)  ;  from  gelatin  the 
yield  was  about  100  per  cent,  of  that  of  the  protein,  from  caseinogen 
70  per  cent.,  and  from  crystallised  egg-albumin  about  50  per  cent. 
Obermayer,  and  more  recently  Treves  and  Salomone,  have  stated 
that  diazo  compounds  can  be  obtained  from  proteins  by  the  action 
of  nitrous  acid,  and  from  these  dye-stuffs  can  be  prepared. 

The  Amino-Index. 

As  to  the  mechanism  of  the  action  of  nitrous  acid  little  is  yet 
known.  E.  Fischer  and  Koelker  have  shown  that  nitrous  acid,  when 
acting  on  polypeptides,  causes  an  evolution  of  nitrogen,  the  quantity 
of  which  bears  no  very  definite  atomic  ratio  to  the  nitrogen  of  the 
polypeptide.  It  is  possible  from  the  colour  of  the  products  that 


68     THE  GENERAL  CHARACTERS  OF  THE  PROTEINS 

nitroso  bodies  are  formed,  which  on  hydrolysis  might  be  expected  to 
yield  the  same  products  as  the  substances  from  which  they  are 
formed,  with  evolution  of  ammonia  (Paal). 

On  the  other  hand,  the  free  amino  groups  in  the  molecule,  as  well 
as  the  amide-nitrogen  groups,  might  be  attacked,  as  in  the  case  of 
asparagine — 

2C4H8N203  +  2HN02  =  2C4H605  +  2N2  +  4H2O. 

The  amount  of  nitrogen  evolved  might  serve  as  a  measure  of  the  free 
amino  and  amide  groups  in  a  protein.  It  must  be  remembered, 
however,  that  the  polypeptides  also  act  on  nitrous  acid  in  a  some- 
what indefinite  manner  (Fischer  and  Koelker) ;  furthermore,  in  highly 
complex  substances,  such  as  the  proteins,  it  is  also  conceivable  that 
only  a  limited  number  of  amino  or  amide  groups  may  be  the  subject 
of  attack,  owing  to  stereo-chemical  reasons.  Nevertheless,  the  amount 
of  nitrogen  eliminated  by  nitrous  acid  treatment  under  certain  speci- 
fied conditions  may  be  a  fixed  quantity  and  a  characteristic  of  each 
individual  protein,  and  the  determination  of  this  so-called  amino- 
index  has  formed  the  subject  of  recent  investigation  by  Horace 
Brown  and  his  co-workers.  It  has  so  far  only  been  applied  to  a 
limited  number  of  proteins.  When  a  pure  amino-acid,  such  as 
aspartic  acid,  is  treated  with  nitrous  acid,  twice  as  much  nitrogen  is 
evolved  as  the  acid  itself  contains,  one-half  being  derived  from  the 
nitrous  acid,  e.g. : — 

C4H7O4N  +  HNO2  =  C4H6O5  +  N2  +  H-jO.1 

In  the  case  of  proteins,  therefore,  one-half  the  nitrogen  evolved, 
expressed  as  a  percentage  of  the  total  nitrogen,  gives  the  apparent 
proportion  of  the  nitrogen  present  in  the  amino  form,  or,  at  any  rate, 
that  proportion  which  will  react  with  nitrous  acid.  This  is  termed  by 
Brown  the  amino-index,  and  is  represented  by  the  symbol  Aol. 
The  following  are  the  amino  numbers  for  a  series  of  proteoses  and 
peptones  obtained  by  fractionating  malt  proteoses  : — 

Malt  proteoses   I.  4/0 

II.  5-o 

„  III.  20'0 

Malt  peptone      I.  10*9 

II.  19-3 

Method. 

The  method  of  determining  the  amino-index  adopted  by  Brown 
and  his  co-workers  is  a  modification  of  that  previously  employed  by 
Sachsse  and  Kormann  for  determining  the  amino-acids  present  in 
certain  technical  samples.  The  principle  consists  in  the  treatment 
of  the  substance  under  examination  with  nitrous  acid  in  statu  nascendi, 
and  the  measurement  of  the  nitrogen  evolved  after  absorption  of  the 
surplus  nitric  oxide  carried  over  by  the  gas.  Certain  errors  were 
found  by  Brown  to  be  inherent  in  the  method  as  originally  suggested 
by  Sachsse  and  Kormann.  The  chief  sources  are  due  to  (i)  the 
residual  air  in  the  apparatus,  or  dissolved  in  the  liquid ;  (2)  difficulties 
attending  the  production  of  carbonic  acid  of  high  degree  of  purity 
when  this  is  employed  for  freeing  the  apparatus  from  air ;  (3)  diffi- 
culties associated  with  the  complete  absorption  of  nitric  oxide  with 

1  With  asparagine  containing  an  amido  group  only  relatively  half  as  much  nitro- 
gen is  evolved.  See  equation  already  given  above. 


GENERAL  CHEMICAL  CHARACTERS  OF  PROTEINS  69 

ferrous  sulphate.  In  order  to  get  the  apparatus  air-free  the  tube  in 
which  the  nitrous  acid  is  allowed  to  act  on  the  protein  is  connected 
with  the  carbonic  acid  generating  apparatus  by  means  of  a  special 
form  of  trap,  from  which  the  air  is  expelled  by  means  of  steam  and 
carbonic  acid  gas.  The  latter  is  evolved  by  the  action  of  hydrochloric 
acid  on  sodium  carbonate  solution  in  an  apparatus  specially  designed 
for  the  mixture  of  the  liquids,  in  such  a  way  as  to  ensure  a  steady 
evolution  of  gas.  The  evolved  nitrogen  is  collected  over  potash 
solution  in  a  modified  form  of  Lunge  nitrometer,  in  which  it  is 
mixed  with  excess  of  oxygen,  obtained  by  the  electrolysis  of  water  ; 
in  this  way  the  nitrogen  is  freed  from  the  nitric  oxide.  The  excess 
of  oxygen  is  afterwards  absorbed  in  alkaline  pyrogallol  solution,  and 
the  volume  of  nitrogen  evolved  is  finally  measured  over  pure  water. 
Precautions  must  be  taken  to  free  all  the  liquids  used  in  the  ex- 
periments from  air.  For  full  details  reference  must  be  made  to  the 
original  paper. 

SECTION  XXI. — ACTION  OF  FORMALDEHYDE  ON  PROTEINS. 

From  the  presence  of  amino  and  imino  groups  in  proteins  it  is 
to  be  expected  that  they  would  enter  into  reaction  with  formalde- 
hyde. The  first  observations  on  such  a  reaction  are  due  to  Trillat 
and  Hauser.  The  former  noticed  that  on  addition  of  concentrated 
formaldehyde  solution,  egg-white  was  converted  into  an  opaque  gelat- 
inous mass,  whilst  the  latter  noticed  that  gelatin,  on  treatment  with 
formaldehyde,  was  converted  into  a  hard,  insoluble  substance.  Blum, 
somewhat  later,  noticed  that  the  addition  of  a  small  quantity  of 
formaldehyde  to  egg-white  solution  caused  the  latter  to  lose  its 
capacity  for  coagulating  on  heating ;  it  remained,  however,  clear  after 
the  addition  of  the  aldehyde.  The  observations  of  Blum  and  of  Trillat 
do  not  appear  to  be  concordant ;  but  the  apparent  discrepancy  was 
later  explained  by  Schwarz,  who  showed  that  dilute  solutions,  especi- 
ally in  absence  of  salts,  remain  clear  on  addition  of  formalin,  and 
lose  their  coagulability,  whereas  more  concentrated  solutions  become 
turbid,  but  can  be  made  to  coagulate  by  the  addition  of  salts.  These 
phenomena  indicate  that  formaldehyde  is  capable  of  acting  on  proteins. 

The  reaction  was  studied  in  greater  detail  by  Benedicenti.  He 
added  dilute  (2  per  cent.)  solutions  of  formaldehyde  to  protein  solu- 
tions, and  estimated  quantitatively  at  given  intervals  the  amount  of 
formaldehyde  which  had  not  entered  into  reaction  ;  for  this  purpose 
he  employed  hydroxylamine  hydrochloride,  which  reacts  with  the 
aldehyde  according  to  the  equation 

NH2 .  OH  .  HC1  +  H .  CHO  =  CH2 :  N  .  OH  +  HC1. 

By  titrating  the  hydrochloric  acid  with  standard  potassium 
hydroxide,  using  methyl  orange  as  indicator,  the  amount  of  formalde- 
hyde in  a  solution  could  be  estimated.  It  was  noticed  that  when 
methyl  orange  was  employed  as  indicator  the  proteins  themselves 
acted  as  bases ;  a  certain  amount  of  acid  was  therefore  necessary  to 
neutralise  the  solution  to  this  indicator  before  the  addition  of  the 
hydroxylamine.  This  alkalinity  diminished  as  the  action  of  formal- 
dehyde proceeded  ;  this  fact  indicated  that  the  alkalinity  was  due  to 
the  presence  of  amino  groups,  and  gradually  diminished,  as  the 
formaldehyde  condensed  with  them  to  form  methylene  derivatives. 


70    THE  GENERAL  CHARACTERS  OF  THE  PROTEINS 

The  reaction  with  dilute  formaldehyde  solutions  (e.gty  4  c.c.  of  a 
2  per  cent,  solution  added  to  10  c.c.  of  a  protein  solution)  was 
somewhat  slow ;  the  maximum  amount  of  aldehyde  had  not,  as  a 
rule,  entered  into  reaction  until  after  two  to  three  weeks ;  after  this 
interval  it  was  found  that  I  gram  of  gelatin  (a  10  per  cent  solution 
of  which  had  been  boiled  to  prevent  subsequent  setting  to  a  jelly) 
combined  with  0*0135  gram  formalin;  10  c.c.  fresh  egg-white 
combined  with  0375  gram,  2  grams  powdered  egg-white  with 
0*0360  gram,  10  c.c.  blood-serum  with  0*315  gram,  3  grams  fibrin 
with  0*0345  gram,  and  5  grams  caseinogen  with  0*0294  gram  for- 
maldehyde. The  compounds  thus  formed  were  no  longer  digestible 
when  treated  with  pepsin,  but  could  be  decomposed  when  distilled 
with  steam,  and  a  digestible  protein  could  be  thereby  recovered  ;  the 
formaldehyde  could  also  be  quantitatively  recovered  in  the  distillate. 
Similar  results  to  those  of  Benedicenti  have  been  obtained  recently 
by  Treves  and  Salomone. 

SchifT  has  also  investigated  the  action  of  formaldehyde  on 
proteins.  He  added  a  concentrated  solution  of  formaldehyde  (40 
per  cent.)  to  a  solution  of  proteins,  and  then  estimated  the  acidity  of 
the  latter.  The  reaction  which  takes  place  is  assumed  to  be  similar 
to  that  which  takes  place  with  the  amino-acids.  The  amino  group 
entering  into  reaction  with  the  aldehyde  forms  methylene  derivatives ; 
the  alkalinity  due  to  the  presence  of  such  groups  is  thereby  elim- 
inated, and  the  acid,  which  before  treatment  acts  practically  as  a 
neutral  body  to  most  indicators,  now  becomes  strongly  acidic  in 
character,  and  can  be  titrated  directly  with  alkalis,  with  the  use  of 
phenol-phthalein.  By  using  this  method  Schiff  found  that  I  gram 
molecular  equivalent  of  potassium  hydroxide  neutralised  3,231  grams 
of  egg-albumin  and  4,680  grams  of  gelatin,  after  solutions  of  the 
latter  had  been  treated  with  formaldehyde.  The  titrations  were 
carried  out  in  some  cases  directly  after  mixture  of  the  proteins  with 
the  aldehyde,  and  in  other  cases  after  the  mixtures  had  stood  for 
twenty-four  or  forty-eight  hours.  The  same  amount  of  alkali  was 
required  for  neutralisation  in  each  case.  The  result  is  not  quite  in 
accord  with  those  of  Benedicenti,  who  found  the  reaction  was  only 
complete  after  two  or  three  weeks ;  he  used,  however,  only  very  weak 
aldehyde  solutions,  whereas  Schiff  used  the  undiluted  commercial 
preparation  (40  per  cent). 

The  results  seem  to  indicate  that  the  reaction  may  be  of  use  in 
estimating  the  amino  and  carboxyl  groups  in  individual  proteins,  and 
thereby  obtaining  other  factors  for  their  characterisation.  It  has 
been  already  employed  by  Sorensen  in  studying  the  process  of 
digestion  of  proteins  by  enzymes.  As  hydrolysis  proceeds  and  the 
polypeptide  groups  are  broken  down,  the  number  of  free  amino  and 
carboxyl  groups  in  a  given  amount  of  the  solution  increases ;  by  treat- 
ing the  products  of  digestion  with  formaldehyde  at  different  intervals, 
and  then  titrating  the  mixture  with  barium  or  sodium  hydroxide, 
using  phenol-  or  thymol-phthalein  as  indicator,  Sorensen  has  succeeded 
in  obtaining  a  new  factor  for  the  study  of  proteolysis  by  enzymes. 

It  seems  possible  that  the  amino  and  carboxyl  factors  in  any 
protein  may  be  determinable  by  a  similar  method,  if  the  suitable 
experimental  conditions  be  ascertained.  Such  factors  might  be  of 
value  for  their  characterisation. 


PART  III. 

BIOLOGICAL  METHODS  FOR  THE  IDENTIFICATION 
AND  DIFFERENTIATION  OF  PROTEINS.1 

SECTION  XXII.— THE  PRECIPITIN  REACTION. 

WHEN  the  necessity  arises  for  differentiating  between  nearly  allied 
proteins  of  different  origins  the  ordinary  chemical  and  physical 
methods  entirely  fail.  No  reliable  chemical  methods  exist  for  dis- 
tinguishing, for  example,  between  human  blood  and  the  blood  of 
other  species,  or  between  the  muscular  tissue  of  one  animal  and  the 
muscular  tissue  of  another.  Yet,  in  actual  practice,  both  in  forensic 
medicine  and  in  the  ordinary  routine  of  food -inspection  and  analysis, 
the  necessity  for  determining  differences  of  this  description  frequently 
arises.  For  this  purpose  biological  methods,  and  especially  the  so- 
called  precipitin  reaction,  have  hitherto  been  almost  exclusively 
employed. 

The  first  observations  dealing  with  this  subject  date  from  1 897  and 
are  due  to  Kraus,  who  showed  that  by  the  injection  of  typhus  bacilli 
into  an  animal  a  serum  was  produced,  which  not  only  caused  ag- 
glutination of  the  bacteria,  but  also  produced  a  precipitate  with  the 
filtrate  of  the  culture  medium.  The  reaction  was  found  to  be  specific 
for  certain  substances  contained  in  this  medium. 

In  1899  Bordet  and  Tschtistowitsch  obtained  quite  similar  re- 
sults with  animal  cells  and  cell  products.  By  the  injection  of  horse- 
serum,  eel-serum,  cows'  milk,  etc.,  into  rabbits,  sera  could  be  obtained, 
containing  the  so-called  precipitin,  which  gave  thick  precipitates 
with  the  substances  used  to  produce  them,  and  with  these  substances 
(the  so-called  precipitinogens)  only.  A  relatively  simple  biological 
method  was,  therefore,  available  for  distinction  between  proteins 
from  various  sources. 

A  large  number  of  investigations  followed  the  observations  of 
Bordet,  which  were  undertaken  with  the  main  object  of  determining 
how  far  the  reactions  were  distinctly  specific. 

Bordet  himself  showed  that  the  serum  of  a  rabbit,  immunised 
against  cows'  milk,  produced  a  precipitate  with  this  milk  and  not  with 
that  of  a  goat,  and  Wassermann  and  Schiitze,  Uhlenhuth  and  others 
found  a  similar  specificity  for  precipitins  produced  by  egg-white 
and  blood.  Of  special  interest  are  the  blood  precipitins.  If  human 
blood  be  injected  into  a  rabbit  a  serum  is  produced  which  gives  a 

1  There  is  a  very  large  literature  on  this  subject,  which  can  be  only  very  briefly  dealt 
with  in  this  place.  Excellent  summaries  are  given  together  with  the  principal  literature 
references  in  the  papers  of  L.  Blum  and  G.  Blume.  Reference  should  also  be  made  to 
the  exhaustive  monograph  on  the  blood  test  by  Nuttall. 

71  6 


72    THE  GENERA!,  CHARACTERS  OF  THE  PROTEINS 

strong  precipitate  with  human  blood,  but  not  with  that  of  a  goat  or 
a  dog.  Such  a  serum  will,  however,  precipitate  the  blood  of  a 
species  nearly  allied  to  that  from  which  the  precipitinogen  is  ob- 
tained, and  the  precipitin  produced  by  the  injection  of  human  blood 
will  precipitate  that  of  an  anthropoid  ape,  although  the  amount  of 
precipitate  formed  will  differ  quantitatively  in  different  cases.  The 
specificity  of  the  precipitin  reaction  is,  therefore,  not  absolute. 

In  order  to  produce  precipitins  the  substance  injected  must  be 
foreign  to  the  animal  employed.  With  a  protein  derived  from  the  same 
species  precipitins  (the  so-called  "  iso-precipitins  ")  are  obtained  only 
in  exceptional  cases.  To  produce  the  most  favourable  results  the 
animals  employed  for  producing  the  precipitins  should  not  be  too 
closely  allied  to  the  animal  from  which  the  precipitinogen  has  been 
obtained,  although  Uhlenhuth  has  recently  succeeded  in  obtaining  a 
precipitin  for  hares'  blood,  but  not  for  that  of  a  rabbit,  by  in- 
troducing into  the  latter  the  blood  of  the  former  animal. 

In  addition  to  the  experiments  with  native  proteins,  experiments 
for  production  of  precipitins  from  chemically  changed  proteins  have 
also  been  carried  out.  Precipitins  have  been  produced  from  crys- 
tallised egg-  and  serum-albumins,  although,  according  to  Obermayer 
and  Pick,  the  precipitin-producing  property  of  these  substances  is  lost 
after  repeated  recrystallisation.  The  precipitinogenic  property  is  not 
lost,  however,  by  heating,  and  precipitins  can  be  produced  by  the  in- 
jection of  coagulated  proteins.  The  property  does  not  appear  to 
be  lost  even  by  boiling  with  -J  per  cent,  hydrochloric  acid  or  sodium 
hydroxide  solutions;  neither  does  it  appear  as  if  the  property  is 
readily  lost  by  the  tryptic  digestion  of  the  precipitinogens,  although 
it  is  readily  lost  by  the  peptic  digestion.  For  this  reason  it  is  not, 
as  a  rule,  possible  to  produce  precipitins  by  the  administration  of 
precipitinogens  per  osy  although  the  formation  may,  in  certain  cases, 
take  place  when  a  particular  protein  is  ingested  in  such  large  quanti- 
ties that  it  escapes  the  action  of  the  peptic  juice. 

Proteins,  therefore,  which  have  undergone  considerable  changes, 
either  by  oxidation  or  hydrolysis,  still  possess  the  property  of  pro- 
ducing precipitins,  which  are  specific  for  the  species  of  animal  from 
which  they  have  been  obtained.  There  is,  however,  according  to 
Obermayer  and  Pick,  another  class  of  changed  proteins  in  which 
this  kind  of  specificity  has  been  lost.  lodo-,  nitro-  and  diazo-pro- 
teins,  for  example,  will  also  yield  precipitins,  but  these  are  specific, 
not  for  a  particular  animal  species,  but  for  other  substances  of  the 
same  class ;  thus  a  precipitin  which  has  been  produced  by  the  in- 
jection of  an  iodo-protein  from  ox-serum  is  not  specific  for  ox-serum, 
or  even  the  iodo  derivatives  from  ox-serum,  but  will  precipitate  iodo- 
proteins  from  other  sera,  and  even  an  iodo-protein  derived  from  a 
plant.  Furthermore,  although  an  animal  cannot,  as  a  rule,  produce 
a  precipitin  for  one  of  its  own  proteins,  it  can  produce  one  for  a 
changed  protein.  In  this  way  a  xantho-protein  precipitin  has  been 
produced  by  the  injection  of  xantho-protein  derived  from  rabbits' 
serum  into  a  rabbit.  Obermayer  and  Pick  think  that  the  animal 
species  specificity  is  due  to  the  aromatic  groups,  and  that  this 
particular  kind  of  specificity  is  lost  by  the  treatment  of  the  protein 
by  reagents,  such  as  halogens,  nitric  acid,  etc.,  which  have  a 
tendency  to  destroy  these  groups. 


BIOLOGICAL  METHODS  73 

The  precipitate  formation  takes  place  most  readily  in  neutral 
solution,  and  is  impeded  by  the  presence  of  mineral  acids  or  alkalis ; 
the  presence  of  salts  is  necessary,  those  of  calcium  exerting  a  speci- 
ally favourable  influence. 

On  heating  a  serum  containing  a  precipitin,  its  capacity  for 
forming  precipitates  is  lost;  the  changed  precipitin  (precipitoid) 
retains,  in  spite  of  this  fact,  its  capacity  for  combining  with  a  sub- 
stance contained  in  the  precipitinogen. 

As  to  the  actual  chemical  nature  of  the  precipitin,  precipitinogen 
and  precipitate  but  little  is  known  ;  the  substance  of  the  last-named 
appears  to  be  derived  chiefly  from  the  precipitin  containing  serum 
(Welsh  and  Chapman),  although  opinions  on  this  point  are  not 
unanimous.  The  precipitates,  furthermore,  are  soluble  in  excess  of 
the  precipitable  substances. 

The  conditions  of  chemical  equilibrium  have  been  recently 
investigated  by  Hamburger  and  Arrhenius.  The  precipitin  used 
in  their  experiments  was  contained  in  the  serum  of  a  calf  which 
had  been  immunised  against  horse's  serum.  In  one  set  of  experi- 
ments a  constant  quantity  of  the  calf-serum  was  added  to  varying 
quantities  of  diluted  horse-serum  (i  in  50)  ;  the  mixture  was 
allowed  to  remain  at  37°  C.  for  one  hour,  and  then  centrifuged  in  a 
funnel-shaped  tube  ending  in  a  graduated  capillary  tube,  in  which 
the  precipitate  formed  could  be  collected  and  measured.  In  a 
second  series  of  experiments  the  quantity  of  horse-serum  was  kept 
constant  and  that  of  the  calf- serum  varied.  If  the  solubility  of  the 
precipitate  in  physiological  saline  (the  diluent  used)  were  the  only 
factor  which  caused  the  diminution  of  the  quantity  of  the  precipitate, 
then,  according  to  the  Guldberg-Waage  hypothesis — 

Concentration  of  precipitinogen  x  concentration  of  precipitin  = 
K(reaction  constant)  x  concentration  of  dissolved  precipitate. 

The  quantity  of  dissolved  precipitate  was,  however,  larger  than 
could  be  accounted  for  by  the  above  equation,  and  Hamburger  and 
Arrhenius  came  to  the  conclusion  that  a  soluble  substance  is  formed 
by  the  combination  of  the  precipitate  with  some  substance  in  the 
precipitinogenous  body  (i.e.,  horse-serum),  and  that  the  conditions 
are  analogous  to  those  existing  in  the  Ca(OH)2 :  CO2  reaction. 

A  detailed  account  of  the  precipitin  reaction  and  of  the  theories 
that  have  been  advanced  to  explain  the  precipitin  formation  need 
not  be  discussed  here ;  it  remains,  however,  to  consider  briefly  the 
practical  applications  of  the  reaction  and  the  technique  of  the 
methods  employed. 

The  method  for  determination  of  the  species  origin  of  a  protein 
is  due  chiefly  to  Wassermann  and  Uhlenhuth.1  It  has  been  studied 
in  great  detail  by  Nuttall,  and  has  been  recently  modified  by  A. 
Schulz  and  extended  by  him  to  the  quantitative  estimation  of 
mixtures  of  proteins.  Owing  to  the  fact  already  mentioned  that 
the  precipitin  reaction  is  not  strictly  specific  for  a  protein  of  any 
given  species,  great  care  is  required  in  the  application  of  the  re- 
action. 

1 A  recent  detailed  account  of  the  method  for  technical  purposes  has  been  published 
by  Uhlenhuth  and  his  co-workers  (Arbeiten  aus  dem  Kaiserlichen  Gesundheitsamt,  1908, 
vol.  xxviii.,  pt.  3). 


74    THE  GENERA^  CHARACTERS  OF  THE  PROTEINS 

The  precipitin  is  generally  prepared  by  several  injections,  gene- 
rally intraperitoneal,  but  sometimes  subcutaneous  or  intravenous, 
following  one  another  at  intervals  of  from  three  to  six  days.1  Rabbits 
are  the  animals  commonly  employed.  The  more  precipitin  a  serum 
contains  the  less  specific  is  it,  i.e.,  the  more  readily  will  it  precipitate 
proteins  other  than  the  precipitinogen.  For  practical  purposes,  there- 
fore, it  is  not  advisable  to  employ  precipitins  of  very  high  grade  ;  if 
sera  be  obtained  which  give  precipitates  with  bodies  other  than  the 
precipitinogens,  it  is  advisable  to  dilute  them  before  use.  In  de- 
termining the  origin  of  a  sample  of  blood  the  material  to  be  in- 
vestigated (clothes,  etc.)  is  extracted  with  physiological  saline,  and 
the  extract  is  filtered  through  a  Berkefeld  filter  and  diluted,  so  that  a 
solution  containing  0*1  per  cent,  protein  is  obtained.  To  2  c.c.  of 
such  a  solution  o*  I  c.c.  of  the  precipitin-containing  serum  is  added. 
The  more  nearly  the  protein  in  the  material  under  investigation  is 
allied  to  the  precipitinogen  employed  for  the  preparation  of  the 
antiserum,  the  greater  the  dilution  in  which  a  precipitate  will 
appear.  To  determine,  therefore,  the  origin  of  a  given  sample  of 
blood  (e.g.y  human  blood),  samples  of  other  bloods  should  be  used  as 
controls ;  the  precipitin  prepared  by  immunising  a  rabbit  against 
human  blood,  for  example,  will  give  with  the  material  under  investi- 
gation a  precipitate  in  much  greater  dilution,  should  it  contain  human 
blood,  than  it  would  if  it  contain  blood  from  any  other  species. 
Furthermore,  the  more  nearly  allied  the  species  to  that  'from  which 
the  precipitinogen  has  been  derived,  the  more  readily  will  its  protein 
give  a  precipitate  with  the  precipitin.  This  reaction  has  been  ex- 
tensively employed  by  Nuttall  for  determining  the  genetic  relation- 
ships of  different  species. 

Another  method  of  applying  the  precipitin  reaction  has  been 
recently  introduced  by  Neisser  and  Sachs.  When  haemolysis  of  red 
blood  corpuscles  is  brought  about  by  a  serum  the  latter  contains 
two  different  bodies,  both  of  which  are  necessary  for  the  process, 
viz.,  the  heat-labile  complement  and  the  heat-stable  amboceptor. 
Gengou  has  shown  that,  when  a  precipitate  is  formed  by  bringing 
together  precipitin  and  precipitinogen  in  the  presence  of  a  haemolytic 
serum,  the  complement  disappears,  even  when  the  amount  of  pre- 
cipitate is  so  small  as  to  be  hardly  visible.  A  haemolytic  serum 
can  be  tested  as  regards  its  haemolytic  power  towards  a  given 
suspension  of  red  blood  corpuscles.  To  a  similar  quantity  of  the 
same  serum  may  be  added  a  precipitin-containing  serum  which  is 
not  haemolytic  towards  the  same  corpuscles.  If  to  such  a  mixture  a 
protein  be  added  containing  a  substance  which  will  form  a  precip- 
itate with  the  precipitin,  it  will  lose  its  haemolytic  properties.  In 
this  way  Neisser  and  Sachs  have  succeeded  in  detecting  human 
blood  in  dilutions  of  I  in  10,000,  or  even  I  in  100,000.  For  sug- 
gested explanations  of  these  phenomena  reference  must  be  made  to 
the  original  papers. 

To  illustrate  the  method  of  employment  of  the  precipitin  reaction 
a  short  description  of  Schulz's  method  for  the  quantitative  estima- 
tion of  proteins  in  mixtures  is  appended. 

1  Nuttall  generally  used  5-10  c.c.  of  serum  for  each  injection,  but  in  some  cases 
smaller  quantities.  For  details  see  his  Monograph,  pp.  54,  55. 


BIOLOGICAL  METHODS  75 

Method. 

Schulds  Method  of  Protein  Estimation  by  Means  of  the  Precipitin 
Reaction. — The  experimental  basis  of  the  method  depends  upon  the 
fact  that  if  an  antiserum  be  added  to  varying  dilutions  of  an  extract 
of  its  precipitinogen  in  physiological  saline  solution  the  turbidity  due 
to  the  precipitate  formation  will  appear  earliest  in  the  most  concen- 
trated solutions ;  the  more  dilute  a  solution  the  longer  will  be  the 
time  interval  before  turbidity  appears.  The  strength  (value)  of  an 
antiserum  can  be  determined,  therefore,  by  ascertaining  the  greatest 
dilution  of  the  precipitinogen,  which  is  just  sufficient  to  give  a  tur- 
bidity within  a  given  time  interval,  which  for  the  purposes  of  experi- 
mental work  has  been  chosen  as  sixty  minutes.  If  the  precipitinogenic 
protein  be  mixed  with  other  proteins  a  more  concentrated  extract 
will  have  to  be  employed  to  yield  a  turbidity  within  sixty  minutes, 
than  would  be  the  case  if  the  pure  precipitinogenic  protein,  unmixed 
with  others,  had  been  employed.  By  determining  the  ratio  of  this 
dilution  to  the  dilution  of  the  extract  of  the  pure  precipitinogenic  body 
necessary  to  produce  a  turbidity  within  one  hour,  the  amount  of  this 
substance  in  a  given  mixture  can  be  ascertained.  The  principle  of 
the  method  can  be  best  illustrated  by  the  example  given  by  Schulz. 
A  given  amount  of  a  mixture  of  horse  flesh  and  other  muscular 
tissue,  weighing  50*57  grams,  containing  x  grams  of  the  former, 
was  extracted  with  100  c.c.  of  normal  saline  (fe).  This  extract  gave 
a  turbidity  within  one  hour  with  a  given  quantity  of  a  serum  pro- 
duced by  immunising  a  rabbit  against  horse  flesh,  when  it  was  diluted 
1 60  times.  An  extract  of  pure  horse  flesh  gave  a  turbidity  under  the 
same  conditions  and  with  the  same  quantity  of  the  same  serum,  when 
the  extract  was  of  such  dilution  that  820  parts  corresponded  to  I  part 
of  the  meat.  The  value  of  the  serum  used,  W,  was,  according  to 

Schulz's  method  of  expression,  = — .     From  these  data  the  amount  of 

horse  flesh  present  in  the  mixture  can  be  calculated  from  the  equation 

=  - — ,  whence;tr  =  19*5.    That  is  to  say,  50*57  grams  of  tissue 

lOOA?        o2O 

contained  19*5  grams  of  horse  flesh.     The  amount  actually  added 
to  the  mixture  was  19*0  grams. 

For  the  purposes  of  experimental  work  a  serum  not  too  rich  in 
precipitin  should  be  employed.  It  should  be  prepared  by  intra- 
peritoneal  injection  of  the  protein,  the  quantity  of  which  is  to  be 
estimated  in  a  given  mixture.  The  antiserum  should  be  steril- 
ised by  filtration  through  a  clay  filter  and  kept  in  hermetically 
sealed  glass  tubes  of  O'6  c.c.  capacity.  Its  value  should  be  freshly 
tested  against  a  pure  precipitinogen  whenever  a  quantitative  estima- 
tion is  carried  out.  The  extracts  of  the  precipitinogen  and  sample 
under  investigation  should  be  carefully  filtered  and  perfectly  clear. 
Physiological  saline  is  used  for  the  extraction  of  the  material,  which 
should  be  finely  disintegrated,  and  kieselguhr  serves  as  a  good  filter- 
ing medium.  As  there  is  a  loss  of  protein  during  filtration,  the 
precipitinogen  and  the  sample  under  investigation  should  be  treated 
in  as  nearly  as  possible  the  same  way  and  the  extracts  filtered  through 
exactly  similar  filters  the  same  number  of  times.  Various  dilutions 
of  the  extracts  can  be  readily  prepared  in  series.  To  0*9  c.c.  of  each 


76    THE  GENERAL  CHARACTERS  OF  THE  PROTEINS 

dilution  contained  in  test-tubes  of  53  x  7  mm.,  O'l  c.c.  of  the  pre- 
cipitin  containing  serum,  measured  from  a  i  c.c.  pipette  graduated  in 

- —  c.c.,  is  added,  the  mixture  is  shaken  and  the  series  of  test-tubes 
100 

allowed  to  stand  for  one  hour.  The  dilutions  of  the  pure  precipi- 
tinogen  and  of  the  sample  under  investigation,  which  produce  tur- 
bidity within  this  time,  are  readily  observed,  and  the  quantity  of 
protein  to  be  estimated  can  be  readily  calculated  by  the  method 
already  described.  The  dilutions  are  arranged  by  Schulz  according 
to  certain  definite  scales.  The  method  has  its  limitations,  for  whereas 
it  can  be  successfully  applied  to  the  estimation  of  a  given  description 
of  muscular  tissue  in  mixtures,  even  when  the  latter  are  not  quite 
fresh,  it  fails  when  applied  to  egg-proteins. 

The  Complement  Removing  Action  of  Neisser  and  Sachs. — The 
following  method  ,was  employed  for  distinguishing  between  human 
blood  and  blood  originating  from  other  species.  0*1  c.c.  of  anti- 
serum  (i.e.,  serum  of  an  animal  immunised  against  human  blood) 
+  0*05  c.c.  complement  (fresh  guinea-pig  serum)  +  varying  quan- 
tities of  normal  sera  of  different  origins,  made  up  always  to  a  volume 
of  i  c.c.  with  physiological  saline,  were  mixed  and  allowed  to  stand 
for  one  hour  at  room  temperature  ;  to  each  of  the  test  mixtures  was 
added  i  c.c.  of  a  5  per  cent,  suspension  of  sheep's  blood  +  0*0015 
c.c.  of  amboceptor-containing  serum  (serum  of  a  rabbit  immunised 
against  ox  blood,  such  a  serum  acting  haemolytically  also  towards 
sheep's  blood)  ;  the  mixture  was  then  allowed  to  stand  at  37°  C. 
for  two  hours.  Quantities  of  'ooi  c.c.  of  human  serum  caused  total 
inhibition  of  haemolysis  ;  in  presence  of  similar  quantities  of  serum 
from  monkeys  a  moderate  amount  of  haemolysis  took  place ;  whilst 
much  larger  quantities  ('Oi  c.c.)  of  sera  from  the  rat,  pig,  goat,  rabbit, 
ox  and  horse  were  incapable  of  preventing  complete  haemolysis. 

A  simplification  of  the  above  process  is  possible.  Normal 
rabbit's  blood  haemolyses  sheep's  blood,  and  this  can  be  employed 
instead  of  a  prepared  immune  serum.  It  was  found  in  Neisser  and 
Sachs'  experiments  that  0*25  c.c.  of  rabbit's  serum  could  completely 
haemolyse  i  c.c.  of  a  5  per  cent,  suspension  of  sheep's  blood.  0^25 
c.c.  of  this  serum  was,  therefore,  mixed  with  the  liquid  supposed  to 
contain  human  blood  and  the  corresponding  antiserum  and  allowed 
to  remain  for  one  hour  at  37°.  I  c.c.  of  the  5  per  cent,  sheep's-blood 
suspension  was  then  added,  and  the  mixture  incubated  again  at  37° 
for  two  hours.  The  absence  of  haemolysis  indicated  the  presence  of 
human  serum. 

The  principle  of  the  method  has  been  applied  to  the  identification 
of  many  proteins  other  than  those  contained  in  blood  and  serum.  An 
account  of  the  researches  with  literature  references  is  given  in  the 
of  Blume. 


BIOLOGICAL  METHODS  77 


CONCLUDING  REMARKS. 

In  the  foregoing  pages  the  chief  properties  of  the  proteins  have 
been  passed  in  review  with  the  object  of  determining  those  which 
might  serve  for  the  purposes  of  isolation  and  identification.  As  a 
result  it  must  be  admitted  that  the  methods  available  at  the  present 
moment  are  extremely  defective. 

The  separation  of  the  proteins  from  one  another  depends  almost 
entirely  on  their  differences  of  solubility  in  alcohol,  water,  salt  solu- 
tions, or  dilute  acids  and  alkalis.  To  the  incompleteness  of  the 
separation  by  differential  extraction  or  by  salt  precipitation  attention 
has  been  already  drawn.  Furthermore,  there  are  large  classes  of  pro- 
teins, to  which  even  these  methods  are  inapplicable,  viz.,  those  which 
are  quite  insoluble  in  the  solvents  mentioned.  For  the  separation  of 
mixtures  of  proteins  of  these  classes  no  methods  are  available. 

The  methods  for  the  identification  of  proteins  are  again  extremely 
defective.  The  unreliability  of  the  physical  constants  has  been 
repeatedly  emphasised.  There  remain  the  biological  methods,  which 
in  recent  years  have  received  considerable  attention,  and  a  few  isolated 
chemical  factors,  such  as  the  sulphur  content  and  the  distribution  of 
nitrogen  in  the  hydrolysis  products.  The  biological  methods  are, 
however,  in  many  cases  uncertain,  and  whilst  they  are  generally 
available  for  the  physiologist  or  pathologist,  they  are  entirely  beyond 
the  scope  of  the  worker  whose  only  resource  is  a  laboratory  devoted 
to  pure  chemistry ;  the  biological  reactions,  furthermore,  require  a 
considerable  interval  of  time  for  their  accomplishment.  For  these 
reasons  their  general  application  must  be  limited,  and  they  are,  for 
the  most  part,  quite  unavailable  for  the  purpose  of  the  technical 
examination  of  products,  such  as  falls,  for  example,  within  the  range 
of  work  of  the  food  analyst. 

For  these  reasons  reliance  will  have  to  be  placed  chiefly  on  the 
purely  chemical  methods  for  the  identification  of  proteins.  Much 
work  remains  to  be  done  in  the  elaboration  of  such  methods,  and  it 
is  not  too  much  to  hope  that,  with  the  rapidly  increasing  knowledge 
of  proteins,  a  reliable  technique  will  be  developed  in  the  near  future, 
such  as  exists  already  for  the  identification  and  differentiation  of  fats. 
It  is  a  necessity  for  the  physiologist,  the  pathologist  and  the  technical 
chemist. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY. 

"SALTING  OUT"  OF  PROTEINS. 

BOMER.     Zinksulfat  als  Fdllungsmittel  fur  Albumosen.     Zeit.  f.  anal.  Chem.,  1895, 

34.  562. 
BURCKHARDT.     Beitrdge  zur   Chemie  und   Physiologic   des   Blutserums.    Arch.   exp. 

Path.  Pharm.,  1882,  16,  322. 

DE*NIS.     Nouvelles  etudes  chimiques.     Paris,  1856. 
DENIS.     Memoir e  sur  le  Sang.     Paris,  1859. 

HALLIBURTON.     The  Proteids  of  Serum.     Journ.  Physiol.,  1884,  5,  152. 
HALLIBURTON.     On  Muscle  Plasma.    Journ.  Physiol.,  1887,  8,  133. 
HALLIBURTON.     The  Proteids  of  Milk.    Journ.  Physiol.,  1890,  n,  448. 
HAMMARSTEN.     Ueber  das  Paraglobulin.     Pfliiger's  Archiv,  1878,  17,  413  and  18,  25. 
HASLAM.     The  Separation  of  Proteids,  I.     Journ.  Physiol.,  1905,  32,  267. 
HASLAM.     The  Separation  of  Proteins,  II.     Journ.  Physiol.,  1907,  36,  164. 
HEYNSIUS.     Ueber  das  Verhalten  der  Eiweissstoffe  zu  Salzen  von  Alkalien  und  von 

alkalischen  Erden.     Pfliiger's  Archiv,  1884,  34,  330. 
HOFMEISTER.     Zur  Lehre  von  der  Wirkung  der  Salze.     Arch.   exp.    Path.   Pharm., 

1887,  24,  247  and  1888,  25,  i. 
KAUDER.      Zur  Kenntniss    der  Eiweisskorper    des    Blutserums.      Arch.   exp.    Path. 

Pharm.,  1886,  20,  411. 

KUHNE.     Erfahrungen  uber  Albumosen  und  Peptone.     Zeit.  f.  Biologie,  1892,  29,  i. 
KUHNE  AND  CHITTENDEN.     Ueber  die  Peptone.     Zeit.  f.  Biologie,  1886,  22,  423. 
LEWITH.     Zur  Lehre  von  der  Wirkung  der  Salze.    Arch.  exp.  Path.  Pharm.,  1887, 24,  i. 
M£HU.     Methode  ^extraction  des  pigments  d'origine  animate ;  applications  diverses  du 

sulphate  d'ammoniaque.    Journ.  de  Pharm.  Chim.,  1878,  28,  159. 
OSBORNE  AND  HARRIS.     Precipitation  Limits  of  Globulins.    Journ.  Amer.  Chem.  Soc., 

1903,  25,  837. 
PANUM.     Neue  Beobachtungen  uber  die  eiweissartigen    Korper.     Virchow's  Archiv, 

1852,  4,  419. 

PICK.     Untersuchungen  uber  die  Proteinstoffe.     Zeit.  physiol.  Chem.,  1897,  24'  24^- 
PICK.     Zur  Kenntniss  der  peptischen  Spaltungsprodukte  des  Fibrins.     Zeit.  physiol. 

Chem.,  1899,  28,  219,  and  Beitr.  chem.  Path.  Physiol.,  1902,  2,  481. 
PINKUS.     The  Precipitation  of  the  Proteids  with  Anhydrous  Sodium  Sulphate.    Journ. 

Physiol.,  1901,  27,  57. 
SCHAFER.     Notes  on  the  Temperature  of  Heat  Coagulation  of  Certain  Proteid  Substances 

of  the  Blood.     Journ.  Physiol.,  1880,  3,  181. 
STARKE.     Beitrdge  zur  Kenntniss  des  Serum-  und  Eieralbumins .     Maly's  Jahresber., 

1881,  ii,  17. 
VIRCHOW.     Ueber  ein  eigenthumliches  Verhalten  albuminoser  Flussigkeiten  bei  Zusatz 

von  Salzen.     Virchow's  Archiv,  1854,  6,  572. 
WENZ.     Ueber  das   Verhalten  der  Eiweissstoffe   bei   der   Darmverdatiung.     Zeit.   f. 

Biologie,  1886,  22,  i. 
WEYL.     Beitrdge  zur  Kenntniss   thierischer  und  pflanzlicher   Eiweisskorper.     Zeit. 

physiol.  Chem.,  1877,  i,  72. 
ZUNZ.     Ueber  den  quantitativen  Verlauf  der  peptischen  Eiweissspaltung.    Zeit.  physiol. 

Chem.,  1899,  28,  132.     Beitr.  chem.  Physiol.  Path.,  1902,  2,  435. 

DEGREE  OF  SOLUBILITY  OF  PROTEINS  IN  SALT  SOLUTIONS. 

HARDY.     Colloidal  Solution.     The  Globulins.    Journ.  Physiol.,  1905-6,  33,  251. 

MELLANBY.     Globulin.    Journ.  Physiol.,  1905-6,  33,  338. 

OSBORNE  AND   HARRIS.      Solubility   of  Globulin  in   Salt  Solutions.     Amer.  Journ. 

Physiol.,  1905,  14,  151. 
PAULI.     Die  physikalischen  Zustandsdnderungen  der  Eiweisskorper.     Pfliiger's  Archiv, 

1899,  78,  SIS- 

78 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  79 

SOLUBILITY  OF  PROTEINS  IN  ORGANIC  SOLVENTS. 

MAYER  AND  TERROINE.  Siir  les  proprietes  des  precipites  d'albumine  par  V alcohol.  Bull. 
Soc.  de  biol.,  1907,  62,  317. 

OSBORNE    AND    VOORHEES,     OsBORNE    AND    CHITTENDEN,    OSBORNE    AND    HARRIS    AND 

OTHERS.     Alcohol    Soluble    Proteins  from    Corn,    Maize,    Rye,    Barley,   etc. 

Numerous  papers.     Amer.  Chem.   Journ.,    1891,   1892,  1893   (13,    14,  15),  and 

other  papers. 

RAMSDEN.     Some  New  Properties  of  Urea.     Proc.  Physiol.  Soc.,  July,  1902. 
RITTHAUSEN.     Die  Eiweisskorper  der  Getreidearten.     Bonn,  1872. 

SEPARATION  OF  PROTEINS  BY  PRECIPITANTS  OTHER  THAN  SALTS. 

LANDSTEINER  AND  UHLIRZ.      Ueber  die  Adsorption  von  Eiweisskorpern.     Zentr.  Bak. 

u.  Par.  I.,  1906,  40,  265. 
MICHAELIS  AND  RONA.    Eine  Methode  zur  Entfernung  von  Kolloiden  aus  ihren  Losungen, 

etc.     Biochem.  Zeitsch.,  1906,  2,  219;  1907,  3,  109;  1907,  4,  n ;  1907,5,365; 

1907,  6,  i. 

CRYSTALLISATION  OF  PROTEINS. 

ABDERHALDEN.     Resorption  des  Eisens,  etc.     Zeit.  f.  Biol.,  1900,  39,  143. 

FREMY  AND  VALENCIENNES.     Recherches  sur  la  composition  des  oeufs  dans  la  serie  des 

animaux.     Compt.  rend.,  1854,  38,  469,  525  and  570.     Ann.  de  chim  phys.,  1857 

[3l»  50,  129. 
GrJRBER.     Krystallisation  des  Serumalbumins.      Sitzungsber.  physik.  med.  Gesellsch. 

Wiirzburg,  1894,  P-  J43' 

HARTIG.     Uebtr  das  Klebermehl.     Bot.  Zeit.,  1850,  no.  5,  881. 
HOFMEISTER.     Ueber  die  Darstellung  von  krystalli  sir  tern  Eieralbumin.     Zeit.  physiol. 

Chem.,  1889,  14,  165. 
HOPKINS.     On  the  Separation  of  Pure  Albumin  from  Egg- White.    Journ.    Physiol., 

1900,  25,  306. 
HOPKINS  AND  PINKUS.     Remarks  on  the  Crystallisation  of  Animal  Proteins.    Journ. 

Physiol.,  1898,  23,  130. 
INAGAKI.     Zur  Kenntniss  der  Eiweisskrystallisation.    Verh.  der  phys.  med.  Gesellsch. 

Wtirzburg,  1906,  38,  17. 

LEIPZIGER.    Edestin,  etc.     Pfluger's  Archiv,  1899,  78,  402. 

MASCHKE.     Krystallisierte  Proteinverbindung.    Journ.  prakt.  Chem.,  1858,  74,  436. 
OSBORNE.     Crystalline  Vegetable  Proteins.    Amer.  Chem.  Journ.,  1892,  14,  208. 
RADLKOFER.     Ueber  Krystalle   proteinartiger    Korper   pflanzlichen    und    thierischen 

Ursprungs.     Leipzig,  1859. 

RITTHAUSEN.     Die  Eiweisskorper  der  Getreidearten.     Bonn,  1872. 
SCHIMPER.     Ueber  die  Krystalle  eiweissartiger  Substanzen.     Zeit.  f.  Krystallographie, 

1880. 

SCHMIEDEBERG.  Ueber  die  Darstellung  der  Paranusskrystalle.  Zeit.  physiol.  Chem., 
1877,  i,  205. 

WALTHER.  Zur  Kenntniss  des  Ichthulins  und  seiner  Spaltungsprodukte.  Zeit.  physiol. 
Chem.,  1891,  15,  477. 

ZINOFFSKY.  Ueber  die  Grosse  des  Hdmoglobinmolekdls.  Zeit.  physiol.  Chem.,  1885, 
10,  16. 

THE  TEMPERATURE  OF  COAGULATION  OF  PROTEIN  SOLUTIONS. 

ARONSTEIN.       Ueber    die    Darstellung   salzfreier    Albuminlosungen    vermittelst    der 

Diffusion.     Pfluger's  Archiv,  1874,  8,  75. 
HAAS.     Ueber  das  optische  und  chemische  Verhalten  einiger  Eiweisssubstanzen,inbeson- 

dere  der  dialysirten  Albumine.     Pfluger's  Archiv,  1876,  12,  378. 
HALLIBURTON.     The  Proteins  of  Muscle.    Journ.  Physiol.,  1887,  8,  133. 
HEYNSIUS.     Ueber  Serumalbumin  und  Eieralbumin  und  ihre  Verbindungen.     Pfluger's 

Archiv,  1876,  12,  549. 

KUHNE.     "  Protoplasma  und  Contractilitdt"     Leipzig,  1864. 
WOLFGANG  OSTWALD.     Influence  of  Electrolytes  on  Coagulation  Temperature.    Abs. 

Chem.  Soc.,  1908,  i.,  p.  375. 

PAULI.  Ueber  die  physikalische  Zustandsdnderungen  der  Eiweisskorper.  Pfluger's 
Archiv,  1899,  78,  315,  and  Part  VI.,  Beitr.  chem.  Physiol.  Path.,  1907,  10,  53 
(with  Handovsky),  and  Beit.  chem.  Physiol.  Path.,  1908,  u,  415. 


80     THE  GENERAL  CHARACTERS  OF  THE  PROTEINS 

» 

SCHMIDT  (ALEX.).     Weitere  Untersuchungen  des  Blutserums,  des  Eiereiweisses  und  der 

Milch  durch  Dialyse  mittelst  geleimten  Papieres.    Pfluger's  Archiv,  1875,  n,  i. 
STARKE.     Beitrdge  zur  Kenntniss  des  Serum-  und  Eier albumins.     Maly's  Jahresber., 

1881,  ii,  17. 
WINOGRADOFF.     Ueber    Darstellung  und    Eigcnschaften    salzfreier   Eiweisslosungcn. 

Pfluger's  Archiv,  1875,  ii,  605. 
References  to  Table  : — 

Fredericq.     Zenlralbl.  f.  Physiologic,  1890,  3,  601  (with  references  to  papers  in  the 
Bulletin  de  1' Academic  Royale  de  Belgique). 

Freund  and  Joachim.     Zeit.  physiol.  Chem.,  1902,  36,  407. 

v.  Fiirth.     Ergebnisse  der  Physiologic,  1902,  I  (i),  no. 

Halliburton.     Journ.  Physiol.,  1887,  8,  133. 

Hammarsten.     Zeit.  physiol.  Chem.,  1884,  8,  467. 

Hewlett.     Journ.  Physiol.,  1892,  13,  798. 

Lacqueur  and  Sackur.     Beitr.  chem.  Physiol.  Path.,  1902,  3,  193. 

Magnus-Levy.     Zeit.  physiol.  Chem.,  1900,  30,  200. 

Morner.     Zeit.  physiol.  Chem.,  1893,  18,  61. 

Preyer.     "  Blutcrystalle,"  Jena,  1871. 

Starke.     Maly's  Jahresber.,  1881,  n,  17. 

Weyl.     Zeit.  physiol.  Chem.,  1877,  i,  72. 

OPTICAL  ROTATION  OF  PROTEIN  SOLUTIONS. 

References  to  Table : — 

Gamgee  and  Croft  Hill.     Ber.,  1903,  36,  913. 

Gamgee  and  Jones.     Beitr.  chem.  Physiol.  Path.,  1903,  4,  10. 

Hopkins.     Journ.  Physiol.,  1900,  25,  306. 

Morner.     Zeit.  physiol.  Chem.,  1893,  18,  61. 

Osborne  and  Harris.     Journ.  Amer.  Chem.  Soc.,  1903,  25,  842. 

Willcock.     Journ.  Physiol.,  1908,  37,  27. 

MOLECULAR  WEIGHT  DETERMINATIONS   BY   CRYOSCOPIC   METHODS. 

A.  DEPRESSION  OF  FREEZING  POINTS. 

References  to  Table: — 

Bugarsky  and  Liebermann.     Pfluger's  Archiv,  1898,  72,  70. 

Ciamician  and  Zanetti.     Maly's  Jahresber.,  1892,  3. 

Paal.     Ber.,  1892,  25,  1202  ;  1894,  27,  1827;  and  1902,  35,  2195. 

Sabanejew.     Ber.  Referatband,  1893,  385. 

Sabanejew  and  Alexandrow.     Ber.  Referatband,  1891,  558. 

B.  DIRECT  DETERMINATIONS  OF  OSMOTIC  PRESSURE. 

MOORE  AND  PARKER.     Osmotic  Pressure  of  Colloid  Solutions.     Amer.  Journ.  Physiol., 

1902,  7,  261. 
MOORE  AND  ROAF.     Osmotic  Pressure  of  Colloidal  Solutions.     Biochem.  Journ.,  1907, 

2,34- 

REID.     Osmotic  Pressure  of  Proteids.     Journ.  Physiol.,  1904,  31,  438. 
REID.     Osmotic  Pressure  of  Hemoglobin  Solutions.     Journ.  Physiol.,  1905,  33,  12. 
STARLING.     Function  of  the  Glomeruli.     Journ.  Physiol.,  1896,  19,  312,  and  1899,  24, 

3i7- 

THE  "GOLD  NUMBER". 

SCHULZ  AND  ZSIGMONDY.  Die  Goldzahl  und ihre  Verwerthbarkeit  zur  Charakterisierung 
von  Eiweissstoffen.  Beitr.  chem.  Physiol.  Path.,  1903,  3,  137. 

ZSIGMONDY.  Die  hochrothe  Goldlosung  als  Reagens  auf  Colloide.  Zeit.  anal.  Chem., 
1901,  40,  697. 

FRACTIONAL  FILTRATION  OF  PROTEINS. 
BECHHOLD.     Kolloidstudien  mit  der  Filtrationsmethode.     Zeit.  physikal  Chem.,  1907, 

60,  257. 

BECHHOLD.     Ultrafiltration.     Biochem.  Zeitsch.,  1907,  6,  379. 
CRAW.     On  the  Filtration  of  Crystalloids  and  Colloids  through  Gelatine ;  with  Special 

Reference  to  the  Behaviour  of  Hcemolysins.     Proc.  Roy.  Soc.,  1906,  778,  311. 
MARTIN.     Separation  of  Colloids  and  Crystalloids.    Journ.  Physiol.,  1896,  20,  364. 
OSBORNE  (W.  A.).     Caseinogen  and  its  Salts.    Journ.  Physiol.,  1901-2,  27,  398. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY 


81 


THE  NITROGEN  DISTRIBUTION  IN  THE  PROTEINS. 

GUMBEL.     Ueber   die   Vcrtheilung  des   Stickstoffs  im  Eiweissmolekul.     Beitr.   chem. 

Physiol.  Path.,  1904,  5,  297. 
HAUSMANN.     Ueber  die  Vertheilung  des  Stickstoffs  im  Eiweissmolekul.     Zeit.  physiol. 

Chem.,  1899,  27,  95  ;  1900,  29,  136. 
HENDERSON.   Zur  Kenntniss  des  durch  Sduren  abspaltbaren  Stickstoffs  der  Eiweisskorper. 

Zeit.  physiol.  Chem.,  1900,  29,  47. 
KUTSCHER.     Ueber  die  Verwendung  der  Phosphorwolframsdure  bei  quantitativen  Bestim- 

mungen  der  Spaltungsprodukte  des  Eiweisses.     Zeit.  physiol.  Chem.,  igoo,  31, 

215. 
OSBORNE  AND  HARRIS.     Nitrogen  in  Protein  Bodies.     Journ.  Amer.  Chem.  Soc.,  1903, 

25,  323- 
SCHULZE   AND   WINTERSTEIN.      Ueber  das  Verhalten  einiger  Monaminosduren  gegen 

Phosphortvolframsaure.     Zeit.  physiol.  Chem.,  1901,  33,  574. 
SCHULZE  AND  WINTERSTEIN.      Ueber  die   Trennung  von  Phenylalanin   von  anderen 

Aminosduren.     Zeit.  physiol.  Chem.,  1902,  35,  40. 

SKRAUP.     Ueber  den  sogenannten  Amidstickstoff  der  Proteine.     Monatsh.,  1908, 29,  255. 
See  also  Transactions  of  the  Guinness  Research  Laboratory,  Vol.  I.,  Part  2. 

THE  SULPHUR,  PHOSPHORUS  AND  HALOGEN  CONTENT  OF  PROTEINS. 

BAUMANN.     Ueber  das  Normale  Vorkommen  von  lod  im  Thierkorper.     Zeit.  physiol. 

Chem.,  1895,  21,  319. 

DRECHSEL.    Zur  Chemie  einiger  Seethiere.     Zeit.  f.  Biologie,  1896,  33,  90. 
DURING.     Ueber  Schwefelbestimmungen  in  verschiedenen  animalischen  Substanzen,  etc. 

Zeit.  physiol.  Chem.,  1896,  22,  281. 
HARNACK.     Ueber  lodospongin,  die  iodhaltige eiiveissartige  Substanz  aus  Badeschwamm. 

Zeit.  physiol.  Chem.,  1898,  24,  412. 
HUNDESHAGEN.     Ueber  iodhaltige  Spongien  und  lodospongin.     Zeit.   angew.   Chem., 

1895,  473. 
C.  TH.  MORNER.     Zur  Kenntniss  der  organischen  Geriistsubstanz  des  Anthozoenskeletts. 

Zeit.  physiol.  Chem.,  1907,  51,  33;    1908,  55,  77. 

OSWALD.     Die  Eiweisskorper  der  Schilddriise.     Zeit.  physiol.  Chem.,  1899,  27,  14. 
OSWALD.     Zur  Kenntniss  des  Thyreo globulins.     Zeit.  physiol.  Chem.,  1901,  32,  121. 
OSWALD.    Weiteresuber  Thyreo  globulin.    Beitr.  chem.  Physiol.  Path.,  1902,  2,  545  ;  and 

other  papers. 
PLIMMER  AND  BAYLISS.     Separation  of  Phosphorus  from  Caseinogen  by  the  Action  of 

Enzymes  and  Alkali.     Journ.  Physiol.,  1906,  33,  439. 
PLIMMER  AND  SCOTT.    Trans.  Chem.  Soc.,  1908,  93,  1699. 
References  to  Table  : — 

(3)  Bang.     Zeit.  physiol.  Chem.,  1899,  27,  463. 

(13)  Chittenden  and  Osborne.     Amer.  Chem.  Journ.,  1892,  14,  20. 

(20)  Chittenden  and  Solley.     Journ.  Physiol.,  1891,  12,  23. 

(2)  Fleroff.     Zeit.  physiol.  Chem.,  1899,  28,  307. 

(i)  Goto.     Zeit.  physiol.  Chem.,  1902,  37,  84. 

(8),  (17)  Hammarsten.     Pfluger's  Archiv,  1880,  22,  431. 

(16)  Hammarsten.     Zeit.  physiol.  Chem.,  1885,  9,  273. 

(19)  Levene.     Zeit.  physiol.  Chem.,  1901,  32,  281. 

(26)  Lubarch.     Encyclopaedic  der  Mikroskopischen  Technik.     Berlin,  1903. 

(5)  Michel.     Wiirzburger  phys.  med.  Gesellsch.     N.F.,  1895,  29,  117. 

(9)  Osborne.     Amer.  Chem.  Journ.,  1893,  *4>  no-  8. 

54),  (12)  Osborne  and  Campbell.     Journ.  Amer.  Chem.  Soc.,  1899,  21,  477. 
7),  (10),  (14),  (15)  Osborne  and  Voorhees.    Amer.  Chem.  Journ.,  1893,  15,  392. 

(4)  Schulz.     Zeit.  physiol.  Chem.,  1898,  24,  449. 

(24)  Schwarz.     Zeit.  physiol.  Chem.,  1893,  18,  487. 

(25)  Siegfried.     Habilitationschrift.     Leipzig,  1892. 
(18)  Walter.     Zeit.  physiol,  Chem.,  1891,  15,  477. 

THE  TYROSINE  FACTOR  FOR  PROTEINS. 

A.  J.  BROWN  AND  E.  T.  MILLAR.     The  Liberation  of  Tyrosine  during  Tryptic  Proteolysis. 

Trans.  Chem.  Soc.,  1906,  89,  145. 
H.  J.  MILLAR.     A  New  Method  for  the  Direct  Estimation  of  Tyrosine  in  Mixtures  of 

Amides  and  Amino-Acids.     Trans.  Guinness  Laby.,  1903,  I,  40. 
REACH.     Quantitative    Untersuchungen  iiber  das  Tyrosin  als   Spaltungsprodukt  der 

Eiweissstoffe.    Virchow's  Archiv,  path.  Anat.,  1899,  158,  288, 


82    THE  GENERAL  CHARACTERS  OF  THE  PROTEINS 

SALT  FORMATION  OF  PROTEINS. 

BUGARSKY  AND  LiEBERMANN.  Ueber  das  Bindungsvermogen  eiweissar  tiger  Korper  fur 
Salzsdure,  N atrium hydroxid  und  Kochsalz.  Pfliiger's  Archiv,  1898,  72,  51. 

COHNHEIM.  Ueber  das  Salzsdurebindungsvermogen  der  Albumosen  und  Peptone. 
Zeit.  f.  Biologic,  1897,  33,  489. 

COHNHEIM  AND   KRIEGER.     Das  Verhalten  der  Eiweisskorper  zu  Alkaloidreagentien 

zugleich  elne  Bestimmung  der  gebundenen  Salzsdure.      Zeit.  f.   Biologic,   1900, 

40.  95- 
ERB.     Das  Salzsdurebindungsvermogen  einiger  reiner  Eiweisskorper.     Zeit.  f.  Biologic, 

1901,  41.  309. 

HARDY.     Colloidal  Solutions.     The  Globulins.     Journ.  Physiol.,  1905,  33,  251. 
LACQUEUR  AND  SACKUR.      Ueber  die  sduren  Eigenschaften  und  das  Molekulargewicht  des 

Caseins  und  seine  Spaltung  beim  Trockenen.     Beitr.  chem.  Physiol.  Path.,  1902, 

3>  J93. 
OSBORNE.     Der  basische  Charakter  des  Proteinmolekuls  tind  das  Verhalten  des  Edestins 

zu  bestimmten  Mengen  von  Sdure  und  Alkali.     Zeit.  physiol.  Chem.,  1901,  33, 

240. 

VON  RHORER.     Ueber  die  Bestimmung  der  Sdureverbindungsvermogen  der  Eiweissstoffe. 

Pfliiger's  Archiv,  1902,  90,  368. 
SJOQVIST.     Physiologisch.-chemische  Betrachtungen  uber  Salzsdure.      Skand.  Archiv, 

i895,  S  277- 
SPIRO  AND  PEMSEL.     Ueber  Basen  und  Sdurecapacitdt  des  Blutes  und  der  Eiweisskorper. 

Zeit.  physiol.  Chem.,  1898,  26,  233. 

THE  PRECIPITATION  OF  PROTEINS  BY  SALTS  OF  THE  HEAVY 

METALS. 

GALEOTTI.  Ueber  die  sogenannten  Metallverbindungen  der  Eiweisskorper  nach  der 
Theorie  der  chemischen  Gleichgewichte.  Zeit.  physiol.  Chem.,  1904,  40,  492. 

HARNACK.  Untersuchungen  uber  die  Kupferverbindungen  des  Albumins.  Zeit.  physiol. 
Chem.,  1881,  5,  198. 

PAULI.  Untersuchungen  uber  physikalische  Zustandsdnderungen  der  Kolloide  IV. 
Eiweissfdllung  durch  Schwermetalle.  Beitr.  chem.  Physiol.  Path.,  1905,  6,  233. 

OXIDATION  OF  PROTEINS. 

BECHAMP.     Recherches  sur  les  produits  d' oxidation  des  substances  albuminoids  par  le 

hy permanganate  de  potasse.    Ann.  de  Chim.,  1889,  57,  291. 
BERNERT.     Ueber  die  Oxidation  von  Eiweiss  mit  Kaliumpermanganat.     Zeit.  physiol. 

Chem.,  1898,  26,  272. 

BLUMENTHAL  AND  NEUBERG.     Deutsch.  med.  Wochenschrift,  1901,  no.  i. 
BoNDzf  NSKI  AND  ZOJA.      Ueber  die  oxidation  der  Eiweisstoffe  mit  Kaliumpermanganat. 

Zeit.  physiol.  Chem.,  1894,  19,  225. 
BRUCKE.     Ueber  elne  durch  Kaliumpermanganat  erhaltene  Satire.     Sitzber.  d.  Wiener 

Akademie,  1881,  83,  III.,  7. 

CHANDELON.     Beitrag  zum  Studium  der  Peptonisation.     Ber.,  1884,  17,  2143. 
EHRMANN.     Ueber  die  Peroxyprotsdure.     Inaug.  Diss.  Strassburg,  1903. 
VON  FURTH.     Beitrdge  zur  Kenntniss  des  oxydativen  Abbaus  der  Eiweisskorper.     Beitr. 

chem.  Physiol.  Path.,  1905,  6,  296. 
GORUP-BESANEZ.     Ueber  die  Einwirkung  des   Ozons  auf  organische    Verbindungen. 

Annalen,  1859,  no,  96. 
HARRIES.     Ueber  Versuche  zur  Spaltung  des  Caseins  vermittelst  Ozon.     Ber.,  1905,  38, 

2990. 
HARRIES  AND  LANGHELD.     Ueber  das  Verhalten  des  Caseins  gegen  Ozon.     Zeit.  physiol. 

Chem.,  1907,  51,  342. 
KUTSCHER  AND  ScHENCK.     Die  Oxydation  von  Eiweissstoffen  mit  Calciumpermanganat. 

Ber.,  1904,  37,  2928. 

Low.     Ueber  Eiweiss  und  Oxydation  desselben.    Journ.  prakt.  Chem.,  1885,31  (2),  129. 
MALY.     Ueber  die  Oxydation  von  Eiweiss  mittelst  Kaliumpermanganat.     Sitzber.   d. 

Wiener  Akademie,  1889,  97,  II. 
MALY.     Ueber  die  •  bei  der  Oxydation  von  Leim  mit  Kaliumpermanganat  entstehenden 

Korper  und  die  Stellung  von  Leim  zu  Eiweiss.     Sitzber.  d.  Wiener  Akademie, 

1889,  98,  II.,  Monatsh.,  1889,  10,  26. 
ORGLER.     Ueber  die  Entstehung  von  Aceton  a^ls  krystallisirtem   Ovalbumin,     Beitr, 

chem.  Physiol.  Path.,  1901,  i,  583. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  83 

POTT.     Oxydationsversuche  mit  Kaliumpermanganat.    Journ.  prakt.  Chem.,  1872,  5  (2), 

355-' 
SCHULZ.     Ueber  die  Oxydation  von  krystallisiertem  Eieralbumin  mit  Wasserstoffsuper- 

oxyd.     Zeit.  physiol.  Chem.,  igoo,  29,  86. 
SEEMAN.      Ueber  die  Oxydation  des  Leims  nnd  des  Eieralbnmins  mit  Calciumperman- 

ganat.     Zentrbl.  f.  Physiologic,  1904,  18,  285. 
SIEGFRIED.     Zur  Kenntniss  der  Spaltungsprodukte  der  Eiweisskorper.     Ber.,  1891,  24, 

427. 
SUBBOTIN.     Einiges  uber  die  Wirksamkeit  des  ubermangansauren  Kalis  auf  Albumin. 

Chem.  Zentralb.,  1865,  594. 
WURSTER.     Ueber  das  Verhalten  von  WasserstoffsuperoxydgegenEiweiss.     Ber.,  1887, 

20,  263. 
ZICKGRAF.     Die  Oxydation  des  Leims  mit  Permanganaten.     Zeit.  physiol.  Chem.,  1904, 

41,  259. 

THE  ACTION  OF  HALOGENS  ON  PROTEINS. 

BLUM.     Ueber  die  lodzahl  der  Eiweisskorper.     Zeit.  physiol.  Chem.,  1899,  28,  288. 
BLUM  AND  VAUBEL.      Ueber  die  Halogeneiweissderivate.     Journal  prakt.  Chem.,  1897, 

56, 393 ;  1898, 57'  365- 

BOHM  AND  BERG.     Beitrdge  zur  Pharmakologie  der  lodes.     Arch.  exp.  Path.  Pharm., 

1876,  5,  329. 
CROSS,  BEVAN  AND  BRIGGS.     The  Chloramine  Reactions  of  the  Proteins  and  Technical 

Applications.    Journal  Soc.  Chem.  Indust.,  1908,  27,  260. 
HABERMANN  AND  EHRENFELD.     Uber  Proteinstoffe.    Einwirkung  des  nascirenden  Chlors 

auf  Casein.     Zeit.  physiol.  Chem.,  1901,  32,  467. 

HOFMEISTER.     Ueber  iodirtes  Eieralbumin.    Zeit.  physiol.  Chem.,  1897,  24»  I59- 
HOPKINS  AND  PINKUS.     Zur  Kenntniss  der  Wirkung  von  Halogenen auf  Proteine.     Ber., 

1898,  31,  1312. 

JENDRASSIK.     Quoted  by  Hofmeister. 
KURAJEFF.    Ueber  Einfuhrung  von  lod  in  das  krystallisirte  Serum-  und  Eieralbumin. 

Zeit.  physiol.  Chem.,  1899,  26,  462. 
LEPINOIS.       Action  de  Viode  sur   les   matieres  albuminoides.    Journ.  Pharm.   Chim., 

1897,  [6]  5.  56i. 

LIEBRECHT.     Ueber  lodderivate  von  Eiweisskorpern  (Casein).     Ber.,  1897,  30,  1824. 
LOEW.     Ueber  Eiweiss  und  die  Oxydation  desselben.     J.  prakt.  Chem.,  1885,  31,  129. 
MULDER.     Ueber  Protein.     Journ.  prakt.  Chem.,  1848,  44,  488. 
PANZER.     Ueber  ein  gechlortes  Casein  und  dessen  Spaltung  durch  rauchende  Salzsdure. 

Zeit.  physiol.  Chem.,  1901,  33,  131. 
RASCHIG.     Monochloramin.     Ber.,  1907,  40,  4586. 
RIDEAL  AND  STEWART.     Note  on  the  Determination  of  Proteids  by  Chlorine.    Analyst, 

1897,  22,  228. 
C.  H.  L.  SCHMIDT.       Ueber  die  Bedeutung  der  lodsdurebildung  bei  der  lodirung  des 

krystallisirten  Eieralbumins.     Zeit.  physiol.  Chem.,  1901,  34,  55. 
C.  H.  L.  SCHMIDT.     Quantitative  Bestimmung  der  bei  der  lodirung  von  Albuminstoffen 

entstehenden  lodsdure  und  lodwasserstoffsdure.     Zeit.  physiol.  Chem.,  1901,  34, 

194. 

C.  H.  L.  SCHMIDT.     Zur  Kenntniss  der  lodirungsprodukte  der  Albuminstoffe,  I.     Zeit. 

physiol.  Chem.,  1902,  35,  386. 
C.   H.    L.    SCHMIDT.     Zur  Kenntniss   der  lodirungsprodukte  der  Albuminsiojfe,   II. 

Zeit.  physiol.  Chem.,  1902,  36,  343. 

ACTION  OF  NITROUS  ACID  ON  PROTEINS. 

BROWN.     Description  of  an  Improved  Apparatus  for   the  Sachsse-Kormann  Process. 

Trans.  Guinness  Research  Laboratory,  1903,  i,  Part  I.,  30. 

BROWN.     The  Nitrogen  Question  in  Brewing.     J.  Inst.  Brewing,  1907,  13,  394  (p.  415). 
FISCHER  AND  KOELKER.     Verhalten  des  Leucylisoserins  und  verwandter  Korper  gegen 

salpetrige  Sdure.     Annalen,  1905,  340,  177. 

LAMPEL.     Ueber  das  Dcsamidoglobulin.     Monatsh.,  1907,  28,  625. 
LEVITES.     Ueber  Desamidoalbumine.     Zeit.  physiol.  Chem.,  1904,  43,  202. 
OBERMAYER.     (Abstract  of  patent  specification.)     Ber.,  1894,  27,  Abstracts,  354. 
PAAL.     Ueber  die  Desamidirung  des  Glutinpeptons.     Ber.,  1896,  29,  1085. 
SCHIFF.     Ueber  Desamidoalbumin.     Ber.,  1896,  29,  1354. 


84    THE  GENERAL  CHARACTERS  OF  THE  PROTEINS 

SCHROTTER.     Beitrdge  zur  Kenntniss  der  Albumosen.     Monatsh.,  1898,  19,  211. 
SKRAUP.     Ueber  Desamidoglutin.     Monatsh.,  1906,  27,  653  ;  and  1907,  28,  447. 
SKRAUP  AND  HOERNES.     Ueber  Dcsamidocasein.     Monatsh.,  1906,  27,  631. 
SKRAUP  AND   KAAS.      Ueber  die  Einwlrkung  von  Salpetrigesdure    auf   Ovalbumin. 
Annalen,  1907,  351,  379. 

TREVES  AND  SALOMONE.     Ueber  die  Wirkung  der  salpetrigen  Sdure  auf  die  Eiweisstoffe. 
Biochem.  Zeitsch.,  1907,  7,  n. 

ACTION  OF  FORMALDEHYDE  ON  PROTEINS. 

BENEDICENTI.     Ueber  die   Einwirkung  des   Formaldehyde  auf  einigen    Proteinstoffe. 

Archiv  f.  (Anat.)  u.  Physiol.,  1897,  219. 
BLUM.     Ueber  eine  neue  Klassc  von  Verbindungen  der  Eiweisskorper.     Zeit.  physiol. 

Chem.,  1896,  22,  127. 
HAUSER.     Ueber  Verwendunge  des  Formalins  zur  Conservirung  von  Bakterienkulturen. 

Munch,  med.  Wochensch.,  1903,  pp.  567-655. 
SCHIFF.     Trennung  von  Amin-  und  Sdurefunction  in  Losungen  von  Eiweisskorpern. 

Annalen,  1901,  319,  287. 
SCHWARZ.     Ueber   Verbindungen   der  Eiweisskorper  mit  Aldehydcn.     Zeit.   physiol. 

Chem.,  1901,  31,  460. 

SORENSEN.     Enzymstudien.     Biochem.  Zeitsch.,  1907,  7,  45. 
TREVES  AND  SALOMONE.     Ueber  die  Wirkung  der  salpetrigen  Sdure  auf  die  Eiweiss- 

stoffe.     Biochem.  Zeitsch.,  1907,  7,  n. 
TRILLAT.     Sur  les  proprietes  antiseptiques  de  la  formaldehyde.     Compt.  rend.,  1892, 

114,  1278. 

THE  PRECIPITIN  REACTION. 

BLUM,  L.     Uber  Prdzipitine.    Zentralbl.  f.  allgemeine  Path.  u.  path.  Anat.,  1906,  17,  81. 
BLUME,  G.    Ueber  die  Methoden  und  die  bisherigen  Ergebnisse  der  Komplementbindung. 

Zentralbl.  f.  Bak.  u.  Par.  I.,  1907,  40,  609. 
BORDET.     Sur  V agglutination  et   dissolution   des  globules   rouges.      Ann.   de  1'Inst. 

Pasteur,  1899,  13,  73. 
GENGOU.     Sur  les  sensibilatrices  des  serums  actif  contre  les  substances  albuminoides. 

Ann.  de  1'Inst.  Pasteur,  1902,  16,  734. 
HAMBURGER  AND  ARRHENIUS.       Ueber  das    Wesen   der  Prdzipitinreaktion.     Maly's 

Jahresber.,  1906,  36,  970. 
KRAUS.     Ueber  spezijische  Reaktionen  in  keimfreien  Filtraten  aus  Cholera,  Typhus, 

etc.,  erzeugt  durch  homologes  Serum.    Wiener  klin.  Wochenschr.,  1897,  p.  736. 
NEISSER  AND  SACHS.     Bin    Verfahren  zum  forensischen   Nachweis  der  Herkunft  des 

Bluts.  Berliner  klin.  Wochenschr.,  1905,  p.  1388,  1906,  p.  67. 
NUTTALL.  Blood,  Immunity  and  Relationship.  Cambridge,  1904. 
OBERMAYER  AND  PICK.  Beitrdge  zur  Kenntniss  der  Prdzipitinbildung.  Wiener  klin. 

Wochenschr.,  1902,  no.  22. 
OBERMAYER  AND  PICK.      Ueber  die  chemischen  Grundlagen  der  Arteigenschaften  der 

Eiweisskorper.     Wiener  klin.  Wochenschr.,  1906,  no.  12. 

SCHULZ,  A.      Die  Technik  quantitativer  Eiweissbestimmung,  mit  Hilfe  der  Prdzipi- 
tinreaktion.    Zeit.  z.  Unters.  der  Nahrungs-  u.  Genussmittel,  1906,  12,  257. 
SCHUTZE.      Ueber  ein  biologisches  Verfahren  zur  Differ  en  zierung  der  Eiweissstoffe  in 

verschiedenen  Milcharten.     Zeit.  f.  Hygiene,  1901,  36,  55. 
TSCHISTOWITSCH.     Etude  sur  I  'immunisation  contre  le  serum  d'anguille.    Ann.  de  1'Inst. 

Pasteur,  1899,  13,  406. 
UHLENHUTH.     Neuer  Beitrag  zum  spezifischen  Nachweiss  von  Eiwciss  auf  biologischem 

Weg.     Deutsche  med.  Wochenschr.,  1900,  p.  734. 
UHLENHUTH.     Eine  neue  Method  zur    Unterscheidung  der   verschiedenen   Blutarten. 

Deutsche  med.  Wochenschr.,  1901,  pp.  82,  260  and  780. 
WASSERMANN  AND  SCHUTZE.     Ueber  eine  neue  forensische  Methode  zur  Untersuchung 

von  Menschen-  u.  Thierblut.     Deutsche  med.  Wochenschr.,  1902,  no.  27. 
WASSERMANN  AND  SCHUTZE.     Ueber  die  Spezificitdt  der  Eiweissprdzipitierenden  Sera 

und  deren  Werthbestimmung  fur  die  Praxis.   Deutsche  med.  Wochenschr.,  1903, 

no.  15. 
WELSH  AND  CHAPMAN.     The  Main  Source  of  "  Precipitable  "  Substance  and  on  the  role 

of  the  Homologous  Proteid  in  Precipitin  Reactions.     Proc.  Roy.  Soc.,  1906,  788, 

297. 


INDEX. 


ACETONE,  from  oxidation  of  proteins,  60. 

Acid  and  basic  functions  of  proteins,  3-6, 39. 

Acidity  of  filtrates,  after  precipitation  of 
proteins  in  presence  of  acids,  46,  47. 

Acids  and  alkalis,  influence  on  coagulation 
of  proteins,  22. 

Aleurone  grains,  18. 

Amide-nitrogen,  34. 

Amino-index  of  proteins,  6,  67. 

Ammonium  sulphate  as  albumin  precipi- 
tant, 9. 

BIOLOGICAL  methods  for  investigating  pro- 
teins, 71-77. 
Biuret  reaction,  30. 
Blood  precipitins,  71. 
Bromine  derivatives  of  proteins,  62,  63. 

CARBOHYDRATE  group  in  proteins,  31. 
Caseinogen,  salt  formation  of,  50,  51. 
Chemical  characterisation  of  proteins,  6. 

—  composition  of  proteins,  32. 
Chlorine  derivatives  of  proteins,  61,  62. 
Chromo-proteins,  33. 

Colloids,  i. 

Colour  reactions  of  proteins,  31. 

Complement  removing  action,  76. 

Concentration  cells,  use  of,  in  investigating 
salt  formation  of  proteins,  39. 

Copper  compounds  of  proteins,  56. 

Cryoscopic  methods  for  determining  mole- 
cular weight,  24. 

Crystallisation  of  proteins,  16-21. 

Cystine  factor  of  proteins,  6,  36. 

DENIS,  protein  investigations  of,  i. 
Depression  of  freezing-point  by  proteins, 
24. 

EDESTIN,  preparation  of,  19. 

—  salt  formation  of,  47-50. 
Egg-albumin,  crystallisation  of,  19. 

salt  formation  of,  40-42. 

Electrolytic  conductivity  of  proteins,  26, 
39,  40-42. 

FORMALDEHYDE,  action  on  proteins,  69,  70. 
Fractional  filtration  of  proteins,  28. 

—  precipitation  of  proteins,  8-15. 
Freezing-point  of  protein  solutions,  24,  39, 

44. 

GLOBULINS,  9. 

Glyco-proteins,  31,  33. 

"  Gold  number  "  of  proteins,  27. 

Gorgonin,  38. 

Gum-mastic,  precipitant  of  proteins,  17. 


HAEMOGLOBIN,  crystallisation  of,  21. 
Halogens,  action  on  proteins,  61-67. 

—  content  in  protein,  37. 

—  protein  derivatives,  6. 
Heat-coagulation  temperature  of  proteins, 

21-24. 
Heavy  metals,  precipitation  of  proteins  by 

salts  of,  56-58. 
Humin  nitrogen,  34. 
Hydrolysis  of  cane-sugar  and  methyl  acetate 

in  presence  of  proteins,  39,  42-44. 

INORGANIC  solvents  of  proteins,  18. 
Iodine  derivatives  of  proteins,  63,  64. 
lodoproteins  (natural),  37. 
Isolation  of  proteins,  i. 

KYROPROTEIC  acid,  59. 
LIEBIG'S  views  on  proteins,  2. 

MAGNESIUM    sulphate    as     globulin    pre- 
cipitant, 9. 
Milk,  separation  of  protein  constituents  of, 

9- 

Mulder's  views  on  proteins,  2. 
Myosins,  9. 

NITROGEN  content  and  distribution  in  pro- 
teins, 32-36. 

Nitrous  acid,  action  on  proteins,  67. 
Nucleo-proteins,  33. 

OPTICAL  rotation  of  proteins,  24. 
Organic  solvents  of  proteins,  16. 
Osmometers,  26. 

Osmotic  pressure  of  proteins,  direct  deter- 
mination of,  25. 
Oxaluramide  from  proteins,  60. 
Oxidation  of  proteins    by    hydrogen  per- 
oxide and  ozone,  60. 

by  nitric  acid,  61. 

by  permanganate,  59. 

Oxyprotein,  60. 
Oxyprotosulphuric  acid,  59. 

PEPTONES,  precipitation  of  by  salts,  9. 
Peroxyproteic  acid,  59. 
Phosphorus  content  of  proteins,  37. 
Polypeptides,  3. 
Precipitants  of  proteins,  30. 
Precipitin  reaction,  71-76. 
Prosthetic  groups,  3,  32. 
Protamines,  32,  33,  39. 
Proteoses  from  Witte's  peptone,  n. 
Pseudo-acids  and  bases,  proteins  considered 
as,  55,  56. 


86 


INDEX 


QUALITATIVE  distinctions  between  proteins, 
32. 

REACTIONS  of  proteins,  30-32. 

SALT  formation  of  proteins,  39-56. 

—  solutions,  solubility  of  proteins  in,  15. 
"Salting  out"  of  proteins,  i,  8-15. 

Salts,  precipitating  capacity  of,  10. 
Serum-globulin,  salt  formation  of,  51-56. 

solubility  of  in  salt  solutions,  16. 

Serum,  separation  of  protein  constituents 

of,  9. 
Sodium  chloride  as  globulin  precipitant,  9. 

—  sulphate,  use  of,  for  salting  out  pro- 

teins, 12. 
Solubility  of  proteins  in  acids  and  bases, 

39- 

Sponges,  iodine  content  of,  38. 
Sulphur  in  proteins,  32,  36. 


THYROID  gland,  iodine  in,  37. 
Titration  of  proteins,  39,  46. 
Tryptophane  reactions,  31. 
Tyrosine  factor  of  proteins,  6,  38. 

UREA  solutions,  solubility  of  proteins  in,  17. 

VITELLINS,  9. 

WITTE'S  peptone,  fractionation  of,  n,  15. 

XANTHOPROTEIC  reaction,  30. 

YOLK  platelets,  19. 

ZINC  sulphate  as  precipitant  of  proteoses, 

12. 


ABERDEEN:  THE  UNIVERSITY  PRESS 


OMOHOi 


11